external/cde
1
0
Fork 0
mirror of git://git.code.sf.net/p/cdesktopenv/code synced 2025-02-13 03:32:24 +00:00
Code Issues Releases Wiki Activity

doc: update man pages to display hyphen-minus correctly.

Browse source
This commit is contained in:
Liang Chang 2022-02-13 05:05:36 +08:00
parent 6cb67ad217
commit bf7e7b2f72
70 changed files with 1354 additions and 1354 deletions
Show stats Download patch file Download diff file Expand all files Collapse all files

4
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/ActionIn.sgm
View file

@ -269,9 +269,9 @@ use. The default terminal emulator is &cdeman.dtterm;.</para>
When a remote <systemitem class="Constant">COMMAND</systemitem> action is
executed on one of the hosts in the list, the terminal emulator associated
with that host is used for that command. The list is passed to the terminal
emulator using the <literal>&minus;e</literal> argument. (Thus, if another
emulator using the <literal>-e</literal> argument. (Thus, if another
terminal emulator than <command>dtterm</command> is used, it must support
the <literal>&minus;e</literal> argument. <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [See <command>xterm</command>(1). ]]></para>
the <literal>-e</literal> argument. <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [See <command>xterm</command>(1). ]]></para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>WaitTime</literal></term>

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/EdSetCon.sgm
View file

@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
<Title>DESCRIPTION</Title>
<Para>The
<Function>DtEditorSetContents</Function> function places a
<SystemItem Class="Constant">NULL</SystemItem>&minus;terminated string, wide character string
<SystemItem Class="Constant">NULL</SystemItem>-terminated string, wide character string
or sized buffer into a DtEditor widget.
Any data currently in the DtEditor widget is lost.
The data is transferred to the

6
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/HelpDial.sgm
View file

@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ widgets and gadgets contained within the DtHelpDialog widget hierarchy. The
following list identifies the names of these widgets (or gadgets):</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Topic Tree &minus; <emphasis>TocArea</emphasis></para>
<para>Topic Tree - <emphasis>TocArea</emphasis></para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Display Area &minus; <emphasis>DisplayArea</emphasis></para>
<para>Display Area - <emphasis>DisplayArea</emphasis></para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Button Box &minus; <emphasis>BtnBox</emphasis></para>
<para>Button Box - <emphasis>BtnBox</emphasis></para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>The DtHelpDialog widget honors all default and user-specified resource

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/HelpQDia.sgm
View file

@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ DtHelpQuickDialog
hierarchy.
The following is the name of the widget:
</Para>
<InformalExample><Para>Display Area &minus; <Emphasis>DisplayArea</Emphasis>
<InformalExample><Para>Display Area - <Emphasis>DisplayArea</Emphasis>
</Para></InformalExample>
<Para>The
DtHelpQuickDialog

4
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/SessionR.sgm
View file

@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The
<Emphasis>restoreFile</Emphasis> argument is the filename of the file containing the application
state information.
This is the filename specified with the
<Literal>&minus;session</Literal> option at application invocation.
<Literal>-session</Literal> option at application invocation.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ otherwise, it returns False.
<RefSect1>
<Title>APPLICATION USAGE</Title>
<Para>The application must support the
<Literal>&minus;session</Literal> command-line option.
<Literal>-session</Literal> command-line option.
</Para>
<Para>The application must use
<Function>XtFree</Function>(3) to free data returned in *<Emphasis>restorePath</Emphasis>.

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/SessionS.sgm
View file

@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ otherwise, it returns False.
<RefSect1>
<Title>APPLICATION USAGE</Title>
<Para>The application should add
<Literal>&minus;session</Literal> <Emphasis>saveFile</Emphasis> when it updates its
<Literal>-session</Literal> <Emphasis>saveFile</Emphasis> when it updates its
<SystemItem Class="Constant">WM_COMMAND</SystemItem> property.
</Para>
<Para>The application must use

12
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_Dt/Term.sgm
View file

@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Set, Part 2 of 2</literal></entry></row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><systemitem class="resource">DtNsubprocessPid</systemitem></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><systemitem class="resource">DtCSubprocessPid</systemitem></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><StructName Role="typedef">int</StructName></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">&minus;1</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">-1</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">G</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><systemitem class="resource">DtNsubprocessTerminationCallback</systemitem></entry>
@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Set, Part 2 of 2</literal></entry></row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><systemitem class="resource">DtNtermDevice</systemitem></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><systemitem class="resource">DtCTermDevice</systemitem></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><StructName Role="typedef">int</StructName></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">&minus;1</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">-1</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">CG</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><systemitem class="resource">DtNtermDeviceAllocate</systemitem></entry>
@ -1283,7 +1283,7 @@ the child process.</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>Shift&lt;Key>osfDown:</computeroutput></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>scroll(&minus;1,line)</computeroutput></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>scroll(-1,line)</computeroutput></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>&lt;Key>osfUp:</computeroutput></entry>
@ -1335,7 +1335,7 @@ the child process.</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>&lt;Key>osfPageUp:</computeroutput></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>scroll(&minus;1,page)</computeroutput></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>scroll(-1,page)</computeroutput></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><computeroutput>&lt;Key>osfPageDown:</computeroutput></entry>
@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ role="2" linkend="XCSA.M5DTT.anch.1">) ]]>associated with the corresponding
keypad key to the child process. The interpretation of these keys is application-specific.
Valid values for <symbol role="Variable">string</symbol> are:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>f1 &minus; f4
<programlisting>f1 - f4
space
tab
enter
@ -1910,7 +1910,7 @@ separator
subtract
decimal
divide
0 &minus; 9</programlisting>
0 - 9</programlisting>
</informalexample>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_tt/trace_co.sgm
View file

@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ allowing a programmer to narrow the trace to the suspect area.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;1</Term>
<Term>-1</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Tracing is turned on if it was off and vice-versa.
</Para>

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/m3_ttdt/s_imp_on.sgm
View file

@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ passes the
<Para>If for some reason no width or height is returned by the other tool,
<Function>ttdt_sender_imprint_on</Function> sets
<Symbol Role="Variable">*width</Symbol> or
<Symbol Role="Variable">*height</Symbol> to &minus;1.
<Symbol Role="Variable">*height</Symbol> to -1.
If no positional information is returned,
<Function>ttdt_sender_imprint_on</Function> sets
<Emphasis>*xoffset</Emphasis> and

594
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/ksh93.sgm
View file

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load diff

106
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/tt_typ_c.sgm
View file

@ -28,8 +28,8 @@
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;mMs</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&numsp;<Replaceable>db</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-mMs</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&numsp;<Replaceable>db</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>source_file</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
<![ %CDE.C.XO; [
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;mMs</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-mMs</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>source_file</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -45,9 +45,9 @@
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;r</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&numsp;<Replaceable>db</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>-r</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&numsp;<Replaceable>db</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>type</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -55,8 +55,8 @@
<![ %CDE.C.XO; [
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;r</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s</Arg>
<Arg>-r</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>type</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -64,42 +64,42 @@
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;p</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;O</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;P</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;sE</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&numsp;<Replaceable>db</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>-p</Arg>
<Arg>-O</Arg>
<Arg>-P</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-sE</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&numsp;<Replaceable>db</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
]]>
<![ %CDE.C.XO; [
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;p</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;O</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;P</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s</Arg>
<Arg>-p</Arg>
<Arg>-O</Arg>
<Arg>-P</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
]]>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;p</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;O</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;P</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s</Arg>
<Arg>-p</Arg>
<Arg>-O</Arg>
<Arg>-P</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>source_file</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;x</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;o&numsp;<Replaceable>compiled_file</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>-x</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-o&numsp;<Replaceable>compiled_file</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>source_file</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;hv</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-hv</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ own databases, and the format of
<VariableList>
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>db</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>db</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the database to work on, which must be one of
<Literal>user</Literal>, <Literal>system</Literal> or
@ -196,13 +196,13 @@ type in the user database overrides the definition in the system
database, and so on.
For the merge and remove options, the default database is
<Literal>user</Literal>. For the
<Literal>&minus;p</Literal>, <Literal>&minus;O</Literal> and
<Literal>&minus;P</Literal> options, the default is all three databases.
<Literal>-p</Literal>, <Literal>-O</Literal> and
<Literal>-P</Literal> options, the default is all three databases.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;E</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-E</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Use Classing Engine mode, instead of the default XDR mode.
</Para>
@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ For the merge and remove options, the default database is
</VarListEntry>
]]>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;h</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-h</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message for invoking
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> and then exit.
@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ For the merge and remove options, the default database is
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;m</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-m</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Merge types into the specified database, updating any existing type with
the new definition given.
@ -242,24 +242,24 @@ If
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;M</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-M</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Merge types into the specified database (see
<Literal>&minus;m</Literal>), but only if they do not already
<Literal>-m</Literal>), but only if they do not already
exist in that database.
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [This action is not supported for Classing Engine mode.
]]></Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;O</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-O</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the names of all otypes read.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;p</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-p</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the ToolTalk types read
in a source format suitable for recompilation with
@ -267,23 +267,23 @@ in a source format suitable for recompilation with
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;P</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-P</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the names of all ptypes read.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;o&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>compiled_file</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-o&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>compiled_file</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the compiled types into the specified file,
or to standard output if
<Emphasis>compiled_file</Emphasis> is &minus;.
<Emphasis>compiled_file</Emphasis> is -.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;r</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-r</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Remove the given ptypes or otypes
from the specified database, as indicated by the
@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ from the specified database, as indicated by the
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;s</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-s</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Silent mode.
Write nothing to standard output.
@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Write nothing to standard output.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the version number of
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> and then exit.
@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Write nothing to standard output.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;x</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-x</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Compile source types into a compiled types file, instead of merging
them into the standard types databases.
@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ them into the standard types databases.
<ListItem>
<Para>A pathname of a text file containing ToolTalk source code.
If
<Emphasis>source_file</Emphasis> is &minus;, standard input is used.
<Emphasis>source_file</Emphasis> is -, standard input is used.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ If
<Term><Symbol Role="Variable">type</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>A name of a type to be removed by the
<Literal>&minus;r</Literal> option.
<Literal>-r</Literal> option.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ If
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDIN</Title>
<Para>The standard input is used only if a
<Emphasis>source_file</Emphasis> operand is &minus;.
<Emphasis>source_file</Emphasis> operand is -.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
@ -452,30 +452,30 @@ where to find the ToolTalk types databases.
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;h</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-h</Literal> option is used,
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> writes to standard output a help message
in an unspecified format.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;o</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-o</Literal> option is used,
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> writes to standard output a listing of all
otypes
read.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;p</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-p</Literal> option is used,
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> writes to standard output a listing of
all the ToolTalk types read,
in a source format suitable for recompilation with
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command>.</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;P</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-P</Literal> option is used,
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> writes to standard output a listing of all
ptypes
read.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-v</Literal> option is used,
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> writes to standard output a version number
in an unspecified format.
</Para>
@ -488,13 +488,13 @@ in an unspecified format.
<RefSect1>
<Title>OUTPUT FILES</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;x</Literal> or
<Literal>&minus;d&numsp;user</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-x</Literal> or
<Literal>-d&numsp;user</Literal> option is used,
<Command>tt_type_comp</Command> writes the compiled types in an unspecified format
into a user-specified file.
Otherwise, it writes the compiled types into the
databases described under
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal>.</Para>
<Literal>-d</Literal>.</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
<Title>EXTENDED DESCRIPTION</Title>

40
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/ttcp.sgm
View file

@ -27,22 +27,22 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttcp</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;pL</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-pL</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>filename1</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>filename2</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttcp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;r</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;pL</Arg>
<Arg>-r</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-pL</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>directory1</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>directory2</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttcp</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;prL</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-prL</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>filename</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
@ -50,8 +50,8 @@
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttcp</Command>
<Arg>&minus;h</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;v</Arg>
<Arg>-h</Arg>
<Arg>-v</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ and directories can also be copied.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;h</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-h</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message for invoking
<Command>ttcp</Command> and then exit.
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ and directories can also be copied.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;L</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-L</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Copy the ToolTalk objects of the files, but do not invoke
<Command>cp</Command>(1) to copy the actual files.
@ -91,12 +91,12 @@ and directories can also be copied.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;p</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-p</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Preserve.
Invoke
<Command>cp</Command>(1) with the
<Literal>&minus;p</Literal> option, which
<Literal>-p</Literal> option, which
duplicates not only the contents of the original files
or directories, but also the modification time and permission modes.
The modification times of ToolTalk objects are preserved only if
@ -106,17 +106,17 @@ the invoking process has appropriate privileges.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;r</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-r</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Recursively copy the ToolTalk objects of any directories named,
along with their files (including any
subdirectories and their files), and pass the
<Literal>&minus;r</Literal> option to
<Literal>-r</Literal> option to
<Command>cp</Command>(1).</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the version number of
<Command>ttcp</Command> and then exit.
@ -125,12 +125,12 @@ subdirectories and their files), and pass the
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>
<Para><![ %CDE.C.XO; [It is unspecified whether the
<Literal>&minus;f</Literal>, <Literal>&minus;i</Literal> or
<Literal>&minus;R</Literal> options to
<Literal>-f</Literal>, <Literal>-i</Literal> or
<Literal>-R</Literal> options to
<Command>cp</Command>(1) are supported.
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [The
<Literal>&minus;f</Literal>, <Literal>&minus;i</Literal> or
<Literal>&minus;R</Literal> options to
<Literal>-f</Literal>, <Literal>-i</Literal> or
<Literal>-R</Literal> options to
<Command>cp</Command>(1) are not supported.
]]></Para>
</RefSect1>
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ used for the output when a single file is copied.
<Term><Emphasis>directory1</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>A pathname of a file hierarchy to be copied with
<Literal>&minus;r</Literal>.</Para>
<Literal>-r</Literal>.</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>
@ -258,12 +258,12 @@ for the processing of
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;h</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-h</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttcp</Command> writes to standard output a help message
in an unspecified format.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-v</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttcp</Command> writes to standard output a version number
in an unspecified format.
</Para>

26
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/ttmv.sgm
View file

@ -27,14 +27,14 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttmv</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;fL</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-fL</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>pathname1</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>pathname2</Replaceable></Arg>
<!-- -->
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttmv</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;fL</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-fL</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>pathname</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
@ -42,8 +42,8 @@
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttmv</Command>
<Arg>&minus;h</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;v</Arg>
<Arg>-h</Arg>
<Arg>-v</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -73,16 +73,16 @@ the object-moving operation.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;f</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-f</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Force.
Do not report any errors, and pass the
<Literal>&minus;f</Literal> option to
<Literal>-f</Literal> option to
<Command>mv</Command>(1).</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;h</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-h</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message for invoking
<Command>ttmv</Command> and then exit.
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Do not report any errors, and pass the
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;L</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-L</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Move the ToolTalk objects of the files, but do not invoke
<Command>mv</Command>(1) to move the actual files.
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Do not report any errors, and pass the
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the version number of
<Command>ttmv</Command> and then exit.
@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ Do not report any errors, and pass the
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>
<Para><![ %CDE.C.XO; [It is unspecified whether the
<Literal>&minus;i</Literal> option to
<Literal>-i</Literal> option to
<Command>mv</Command>(1) is supported.
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [The
<Literal>&minus;i</Literal> option to
<Literal>-i</Literal> option to
<Command>cp</Command>(1) is not supported.
]]></Para>
</RefSect1>
@ -219,12 +219,12 @@ for the processing of
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;h</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-h</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttmv</Command> writes to standard output a help message
in an unspecified format.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-v</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttmv</Command> writes to standard output a version number
in an unspecified format.
</Para>

32
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/ttrm.sgm
View file

@ -27,14 +27,14 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttrm</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;frL</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-frL</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>pathname</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttrm</Command>
<Arg>&minus;h</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;v</Arg>
<Arg>-h</Arg>
<Arg>-v</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -64,16 +64,16 @@ the object-removing operation.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;f</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-f</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Force.
Do not report any errors, and pass the
<Literal>&minus;f</Literal> option to
<Literal>-f</Literal> option to
<Command>rm</Command>(1).</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;h</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-h</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message for invoking
<Command>ttrm</Command> and then exit.
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Do not report any errors, and pass the
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;L</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-L</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Remove the ToolTalk objects of the files or directories, but do not invoke
<Command>rm</Command>(1) to remove the actual files or directories.
@ -89,17 +89,17 @@ Do not report any errors, and pass the
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;r</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-r</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Recursively remove the ToolTalk objects of any directories named,
along with their files (including any
subdirectories and their files), and pass the
<Literal>&minus;r</Literal> option to
<Literal>-r</Literal> option to
<Command>rm</Command>(1).</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the version number of
<Command>ttrm</Command> and then exit.
@ -108,12 +108,12 @@ subdirectories and their files), and pass the
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>
<Para><![ %CDE.C.XO; [It is unspecified whether the
<Literal>&minus;i</Literal> or
<Literal>&minus;R</Literal> options to
<Literal>-i</Literal> or
<Literal>-R</Literal> options to
<Command>rm</Command>(1) are supported.
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [The
<Literal>&minus;i</Literal> or
<Literal>&minus;R</Literal> options to
<Literal>-i</Literal> or
<Literal>-R</Literal> options to
<Command>rm</Command>(1) are not supported.
]]></Para>
</RefSect1>
@ -207,12 +207,12 @@ for the processing of
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;h</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-h</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttrm</Command> writes to standard output a help message
in an unspecified format.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-v</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttrm</Command> writes to standard output a version number
in an unspecified format.
</Para>

20
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/ttrmdir.sgm
View file

@ -27,14 +27,14 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttrmdir</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;L</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-L</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttrmdir</Command>
<Arg>&minus;h</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;v</Arg>
<Arg>-h</Arg>
<Arg>-v</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ object-removing operation.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;h</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-h</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message for invoking
<Command>ttrmdir</Command> and then exit.
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ object-removing operation.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;L</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-L</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Remove the ToolTalk objects of the directories, but do not invoke
<Command>rmdir</Command>(1) to remove the actual directories.
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ object-removing operation.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the version number of
<Command>ttrmdir</Command> and then exit.
@ -89,10 +89,10 @@ object-removing operation.
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>
<Para><![ %CDE.C.XO; [It is unspecified whether the
<Literal>&minus;p</Literal> option to
<Literal>-p</Literal> option to
<Command>cp</Command>(1) is supported.
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [The
<Literal>&minus;p</Literal> option to
<Literal>-p</Literal> option to
<Command>cp</Command>(1) is not supported.
]]></Para>
</RefSect1>
@ -186,12 +186,12 @@ for the processing of
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;h</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-h</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttrmdir</Command> writes to standard output a help message
in an unspecified format.
</Para>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-v</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttrmdir</Command> writes to standard output a version number
in an unspecified format.
</Para>

70
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/ttsessio.sgm
View file

@ -27,15 +27,15 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttsession</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;hNpsStv</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-hNpsStv</Arg>
<Group>
<Arg>&minus;E</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;X</Arg>
<Arg>-E</Arg>
<Arg>-X</Arg>
</Group>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;a&ensp;<Replaceable>level</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&ensp;<Replaceable>display</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-a&ensp;<Replaceable>level</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&ensp;<Replaceable>display</Replaceable></Arg>
<Group>
<Arg>&minus;c&ensp;</Arg>
<Arg>-c&ensp;</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt"><Replaceable>command</Replaceable></Arg>
</Group>
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ by any program that needs to send or receive a message.
<![ %CDE.C.XO; [
<Para>The
<Command>ttsession</Command> utility supports the &str-Zu;, except that the
<Literal>&minus;c</Literal> option has an optional option-argument,
<Literal>-c</Literal> option has an optional option-argument,
which treats all of the following command-line arguments
as a string to be passed to another shell invocation.
</Para>
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ as a string to be passed to another shell invocation.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;a&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">level</Symbol></Term>
<Term><Literal>-a&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">level</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Set the server authentication level.
The following
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ The following
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;c&numsp;[</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">command</Symbol><Literal>]</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-c&numsp;[</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">command</Symbol><Literal>]</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Start a process tree session and run the given command.
The
@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ If
<Command>ttsession</Command> invokes the shell named by the
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">SHELL</SystemItem> environment variable.
Everything after
<Literal>&minus;c</Literal> on the command line is used as the command to be executed.
<Literal>-c</Literal> on the command line is used as the command to be executed.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;d&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">display</Symbol></Term>
<Term><Literal>-d&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">display</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify an X Windows display.
The ToolTalk session will consist of those applications
@ -123,18 +123,18 @@ The default display is identified by the
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;E</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-E</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Read in the types from the Classing Engine database.
If neither
<Literal>&minus;E</Literal> nor
<Literal>&minus;X</Literal> is given,
<Literal>&minus;X</Literal> is assumed.
<Literal>-E</Literal> nor
<Literal>-X</Literal> is given,
<Literal>-X</Literal> is assumed.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;h</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-h</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message to standard error that
describes the command syntax of
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ describes the command syntax of
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;N</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-N</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Maximize the number of clients allowed to connect to (in other words, open
procids in) this session by attempting to raise the limit of
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ on some systems this option may have no effect.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;p</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-p</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the name of a new process tree session to standard output, and then
fork a background instance of
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ fork a background instance of
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;s</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-s</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Silent.
Do not write any warning messages to standard error.
@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Do not write any warning messages to standard error.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;S</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-S</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Do not fork a background instance to manage the
<Command>ttsession</Command> session.
@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Do not write any warning messages to standard error.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;t</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-t</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Turn on trace mode.
See
@ -195,14 +195,14 @@ a given process is also shown together with the success of that attempt.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write the version number to standard output and exit.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;X</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-X</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Read in the types from the following XDR format databases:
</Para>
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ See
<RefSect1>
<Title>INPUT FILES</Title>
<Para>The XDR format databases listed by the
<Literal>&minus;X</Literal> option are serialized ToolTalk data structures of
<Literal>-X</Literal> option are serialized ToolTalk data structures of
an unspecified format, except that it is the same
as the format of
&cdeman.tt.type.comp; output files.
@ -275,11 +275,11 @@ service will auto-start one.
</Para>
<Para>If
<Command>ttsession</Command> is run with the
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> option and
<Literal>-d</Literal> option and
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</SystemItem> is not set,
<Command>ttsession</Command> sets
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</SystemItem> to be the value of the
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> option for itself and all processes it forks.
<Literal>-d</Literal> option for itself and all processes it forks.
This helps ToolTalk clients to find the right X display when
they are auto-started by
<Command>ttsession</Command>.</Para>
@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ The format of the variable is implementation specific.
<Command>ttsession</Command> utility reacts to two signals.
If it receives the
<SystemItem Class="Constant">SIGUSR1</SystemItem> signal, it toggles trace mode on or off (see the
<Literal>&minus;t</Literal> option).
<Literal>-t</Literal> option).
If it receives the
<SystemItem Class="Constant">SIGUSR2</SystemItem> signal, it rereads the types file.
The
@ -428,17 +428,17 @@ The
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-v</Literal> option is used,
<Command>ttsession</Command> writes the version number in an unspecified format.
When
<Literal>&minus;p</Literal> is used,
<Literal>-p</Literal> is used,
<Command>ttsession</Command> writes the name of a new process tree session.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDERR</Title>
<Para>Used only for diagnostic messages and the help message written by the
<Literal>&minus;h</Literal> option.
<Literal>-h</Literal> option.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ When
<RefSect1>
<Title>EXIT STATUS</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;c</Literal> child process exits,
<Literal>-c</Literal> child process exits,
<Command>ttsession</Command> exits with the status of the exited child.
Otherwise, the following exit values are returned:
</Para>
@ -464,8 +464,8 @@ Otherwise, the following exit values are returned:
<ListItem>
<Para>Normal termination.
Without the
<Literal>&minus;c</Literal> or
<Literal>&minus;S</Literal> options, a zero exit status means
<Literal>-c</Literal> or
<Literal>-S</Literal> options, a zero exit status means
<Command>ttsession</Command> has successfully forked an instance of itself that has begun
serving the session.
</Para>
@ -507,8 +507,8 @@ Another
<RefSect1>
<Title>APPLICATION USAGE</Title>
<Para>Since everything after
<Literal>&minus;c</Literal> on the command line is used as the command to be executed,
<Literal>&minus;c</Literal> should be the last option.
<Literal>-c</Literal> on the command line is used as the command to be executed,
<Literal>-c</Literal> should be the last option.
</Para>
<Para>Tracing is helpful for seeing how messages are
dispatched and delivered, but the output may be voluminous.

38
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1/tttar.sgm
View file

@ -19,15 +19,15 @@ objects in an archive</refpurpose></refnamediv><!-- $XConsortium: tttar.sgm
<command>tttar c</command><arg>t</arg><arg>x</arg><arg choice="opt">EfhpSv</arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>tarfile</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>pathname</replaceable></arg><arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>tttar c</command><arg>t</arg><arg>xfL</arg><arg choice="opt">EhpRSv</arg><arg><replaceable>tttarfile</replaceable></arg><group><group><arg>&minus;rename <replaceable>oldname</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>newname</replaceable></arg></group>
<command>tttar c</command><arg>t</arg><arg>xfL</arg><arg choice="opt">EhpRSv</arg><arg><replaceable>tttarfile</replaceable></arg><group><group><arg>-rename <replaceable>oldname</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>newname</replaceable></arg></group>
<arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</arg></group><arg><replaceable>pathname</replaceable></arg>
<arg>.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>tttar</command><arg>&minus;h</arg><arg>&minus;help</arg>
<command>tttar</command><arg>-h</arg><arg>-help</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>tttar</command><arg>&minus;v</arg>
<command>tttar</command><arg>-v</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv><refsect1>
<title>DESCRIPTION</title>
@ -70,38 +70,38 @@ the current working directory must be writable, so that the <emphasis>tttarfile<
<title>OPTIONS</title><![ %CDE.C.XO; [<Para>The
<Command>tttar</Command> utility supports the &str-Zu;,
except that the
<Literal>&minus;help</Literal> and
<Literal>&minus;rename</Literal> options are full words, which cannot be combined
<Literal>-help</Literal> and
<Literal>-rename</Literal> options are full words, which cannot be combined
with the other options, and
<Literal>&minus;rename</Literal> can only be used after
<Literal>-rename</Literal> can only be used after
the first operand,
<Emphasis>tttarfile</Emphasis>.</Para>
]]>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para></para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;help</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-help</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Write a help message for invoking <command>tttar</command> and then
exit.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;rename</literal><emphasis>&numsp;oldname&numsp;newname</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-rename</literal><emphasis>&numsp;oldname&numsp;newname</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Interpret the next two arguments as an <emphasis>oldname</emphasis>
and a <emphasis>newname</emphasis>, respectively, and rename any entry archived
as <emphasis>oldname</emphasis> to <emphasis>newname</emphasis>. If <emphasis>oldname</emphasis> is a directory, then <command>tttar</command> recursively
renames the entries as well. If more than one <literal>&minus;rename</literal>
renames the entries as well. If more than one <literal>-rename</literal>
option applies to an entry (because of one or more parent directories being
renamed), the most specific <literal>&minus;rename</literal> option applies.
renamed), the most specific <literal>-rename</literal> option applies.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;v</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-v</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Write the version number of <command>tttar</command> and then exit.
</para>
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ the same character more than once produces undefined results.</para>
<varlistentry><term><literal>f</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Use the next argument as the name of the <emphasis>tttarfile</emphasis>.
If <emphasis>tttarfile</emphasis> is given as `<literal>&minus;</literal>', <command>tttar</command> writes to the standard output or reads from the standard input,
If <emphasis>tttarfile</emphasis> is given as `<literal>-</literal>', <command>tttar</command> writes to the standard output or reads from the standard input,
whichever is appropriate.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -214,12 +214,12 @@ just the name.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>The <Literal>X</Literal> and <Literal>F</Literal> function modifiers
and the <literal>&minus;I</literal> option of <command>tar</command>(1), for
and the <literal>-I</literal> option of <command>tar</command>(1), for
including or excluding files from being archived based on SCCS status or being
listed in a special file.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>The <literal>w</literal> function modifier and the <literal>&minus;C</literal> option of <command>tar</command>(1), for pausing or changing directories
<para>The <literal>w</literal> function modifier and the <literal>-C</literal> option of <command>tar</command>(1), for pausing or changing directories
between the files listed on the command line.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ ToolTalk objects.</para>
</refsect1><refsect1>
<title>STDIN</title>
<para>When the <literal>f</literal> modifier is used with the <literal>t</literal>
or <literal>x</literal> function letter and the pathname is &minus;, the standard
or <literal>x</literal> function letter and the pathname is -, the standard
input is an archive file formatted as described in <literal>EXTENDED DESCRIPTION</literal>. Otherwise, the standard input is not used.</para>
</refsect1><refsect1>
<title>INPUT FILES</title>
@ -313,12 +313,12 @@ written to standard output.</para>
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<para>The <command>tttar</command> utility takes the standard
action for all signals.</para>]]></refsect1><refsect1>
<title>STDOUT</title>
<para>When the <literal>&minus;h</literal> option is used, <command>tttar</command> writes to standard output a help message in an unspecified format.
<para>When the <literal>-h</literal> option is used, <command>tttar</command> writes to standard output a help message in an unspecified format.
</para>
<para>When the <literal>&minus;v</literal> option is used, <command>tttar</command> writes to standard output a version number in an unspecified format.
<para>When the <literal>-v</literal> option is used, <command>tttar</command> writes to standard output a version number in an unspecified format.
</para>
<para>When the <literal>f</literal> modifier is used with the <literal>c</literal>
function letter and the pathname is &minus;, the standard output is an archive
function letter and the pathname is -, the standard output is an archive
file formatted as described in <literal>EXTENDED DESCRIPTION</literal>.</para>
<para>Otherwise, the standard output is not used.</para>
</refsect1><refsect1>

20
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/action.sgm
View file

@ -28,10 +28,10 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtaction</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;contextDir&numsp;<Replaceable>context_dir</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;execHost&numsp;<Replaceable>host_name</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;termOpts&numsp;<Replaceable>terminal_arguments</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;user&numsp;<Replaceable>user_name</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-contextDir&numsp;<Replaceable>context_dir</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-execHost&numsp;<Replaceable>host_name</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-termOpts&numsp;<Replaceable>terminal_arguments</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-user&numsp;<Replaceable>user_name</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>action_name</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt"><Replaceable>action_arg</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>...</Arg>
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ the X Window System convention of full-word options.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;contextDir</Literal> <Emphasis>context_dir</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-contextDir</Literal> <Emphasis>context_dir</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>If the definition of
<Emphasis>action_name</Emphasis> does not define
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ the user can use this option to specify a default directory context.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;execHost</Literal> <Emphasis>host_name</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-execHost</Literal> <Emphasis>host_name</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The user can use this option to specify an alternative execution host,
<Emphasis>host_name</Emphasis>, for a command action.
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ specified action on any eligible host.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;termOpts</Literal> <Emphasis>terminal_arguments</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-termOpts</Literal> <Emphasis>terminal_arguments</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>This option allows the user to specify arguments intended for the terminal
emulator that is provided for command actions that are not of type
@ -134,15 +134,15 @@ These arguments are passed unchanged to the terminal emulator.
The user must ensure that they are reasonable; in particular,
<Emphasis>terminal_arguments</Emphasis> does not allow the argument that specifies the command
to be run in a terminal emulator window (that is,
<Literal>&minus;e</Literal> for
<Literal>-e</Literal> for
&cdeman.dtterm;).</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;user</Literal> <Emphasis>user_name</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-user</Literal> <Emphasis>user_name</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The
<Literal>&minus;user</Literal> option allows a user to specify a user name.
<Literal>-user</Literal> option allows a user to specify a user name.
If
<Command>dtaction</Command> is not currently running as that user, a prompt dialog
collects the indicated user password, or the root user

26
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/appinteg.sgm
View file

@ -26,11 +26,11 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtappintegrate</Command>
<Arg>&minus;s&numsp;<Replaceable>application_root</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;t&numsp;<Replaceable>target_path</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;l&numsp;<Replaceable>locale</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;u</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;?</Arg>
<Arg>-s&numsp;<Replaceable>application_root</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-t&numsp;<Replaceable>target_path</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-l&numsp;<Replaceable>locale</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-u</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-?</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ files under the following default &str-XZ; system locations:
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;s&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>application_root</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-s&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>application_root</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Integrate the application files that are located under
<Emphasis>application_root</Emphasis>. The
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ containing the application's default &str-XZ; configuration files:
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;t&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>target_path</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-t&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>target_path</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Link the application &str-XZ; configuration files to
<Emphasis>target_path</Emphasis> rather than to the default &str-XZ; system locations.
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ containing the application's default &str-XZ; configuration files:
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;l&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">locale</Symbol></Term>
<Term><Literal>-l&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">locale</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Integrate only the files found in the
<Symbol Role="Variable">locale</Symbol> subdirectories.
@ -153,12 +153,12 @@ configuration files are integrated.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;u</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-u</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Destroy the symbolic links previously created by
<Command>dtappintegrate.</Command> If
<Literal>&minus;l</Literal> is specified with the
<Literal>&minus;u</Literal> option, only the
<Literal>-l</Literal> is specified with the
<Literal>-u</Literal> option, only the
symbolic links to the
&str-XZ; configuration files in the specified
<Symbol Role="Variable">locale</Symbol> subdirectories
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ are destroyed.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;?</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-?</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Write a help message to standard output that describes the command syntax of
<Command>dtappintegrate</Command> and exit.
@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ are destroyed.
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When no option or the
<Literal>&minus;?</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-?</Literal> option is used,
<Command>dtappintegrate</Command> writes to standard output a usage message.
</Para>
<Para>During execution,

6
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/builder.sgm
View file

@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
CDE Application Builder</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtbuilder</command><arg choice="opt">projectfile</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;useWC&numsp;<replaceable>class<?Pub Caret></replaceable></arg>
<command>dtbuilder</command><arg choice="opt">projectfile</arg><arg choice="opt">-useWC&numsp;<replaceable>class<?Pub Caret></replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Help).</para>
<refsect1>
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;useWC&numsp;</literal><emphasis>class</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-useWC&numsp;</literal><emphasis>class</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Use the specified widget class whenever possible. Valid values are:
</para>
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ by the user.</para>
</refsect1>
<refsect1>
<title>RESOURCES</title>
<para>If the <literal>&minus;useWC</literal> option is not specified, <command>dtbuilder</command> uses the <literal>useWidgetClass</literal> resource in
<para>If the <literal>-useWC</literal> option is not specified, <command>dtbuilder</command> uses the <literal>useWidgetClass</literal> resource in
the Xt resources table to determine which class to use for generated widgets.
The class/type is <symbol>XmCUseWidgetClass</symbol>/<symbol>XtEnum</symbol> and the valid
values are:</para>

22
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/cm_delet.sgm
View file

@ -26,9 +26,9 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtcm_delete</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;c&numsp;<Replaceable>calendar</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&numsp;<Replaceable>date</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;v&numsp;<Replaceable>view</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-c&numsp;<Replaceable>calendar</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&numsp;<Replaceable>date</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-v&numsp;<Replaceable>view</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ Each of the components of an
appointment is specified using one of the command-line options.
The current list of appointments for the specified date
(see the
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> and
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> options) is displayed,
<Literal>-d</Literal> and
<Literal>-v</Literal> options) is displayed,
numbered sequentially starting with 1.
The user is prompted for the number to delete.
Once an appointment
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ the user can specify another number, or just
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;c&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>calendar</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-c&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>calendar</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the name of the target calendar.
Calendar names
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ the current user at the current host machine.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>date</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>date</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the date for the appointment(s) to be deleted.
The
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ are correctly calculated.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>view</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>view</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the view span of appointments to display.
The
@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ The
<Term><Literal>day</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Display all appointments for the given date (see
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> option).
<Literal>-d</Literal> option).
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Item to delete (number)?
<Para>To delete at a specific date:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_delete &minus;d 09/26/90
<ProgramListing>dtcm_delete -d 09/26/90
Appointments for Wednesday September 26, 1990:
1) 11:00am-12:00pm Appointment
2) 11:30am-12:30pm Group Lunch
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Item to delete (number)?
<Para>To delete from a specific target calendar:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_delete &minus;c felix@cat
<ProgramListing>dtcm_delete -c felix@cat
Appointments for Tuesday September 25, 1990:
1) Appointment
2) 10:15am-10:30am Coffee

44
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/cm_inser.sgm
View file

@ -26,12 +26,12 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtcm_insert</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;c&numsp;<Replaceable>calendar</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&numsp;<Replaceable>date</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s&numsp;<Replaceable>start</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;e&numsp;<Replaceable>end</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;v&numsp;<Replaceable>view</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;w&numsp;<Replaceable>what</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-c&numsp;<Replaceable>calendar</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&numsp;<Replaceable>date</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s&numsp;<Replaceable>start</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-e&numsp;<Replaceable>end</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-v&numsp;<Replaceable>view</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-w&numsp;<Replaceable>what</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ appointment is specified using one of the command-line options.
Once an appointment
is added, the list of appointments for the specified date
(see the
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> and
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> options) is displayed.
<Literal>-d</Literal> and
<Literal>-v</Literal> options) is displayed.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ is added, the list of appointments for the specified date
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;c&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>calendar</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-c&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>calendar</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the name of the target calendar.
Calendar names
@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ the current user at the current host machine.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>date</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>date</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the date for the appointment(s) to be inserted.
The
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ are correctly calculated.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;s&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">start</Symbol></Term>
<Term><Literal>-s&numsp;</Literal><Symbol Role="Variable">start</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the starting time for the appointment.
The time is specified using the form
@ -118,16 +118,16 @@ no time is associated with the inserted appointment.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;e&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>end</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-e&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>end</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The ending time for the appointment,
in the same format as
<Literal>&minus;s</Literal>. Specifying an ending time without a starting time is an error.
<Literal>-s</Literal>. Specifying an ending time without a starting time is an error.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>view</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>view</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the view span of appointments to display.
The
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ The
<Term><Literal>day</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Display all appointments for the given date (see
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> option).
<Literal>-d</Literal> option).
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ starting with Sunday.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;w&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>what</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-w&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>what</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the appointment description text.
Up to 5 lines of text can be specified by placing &bsol;n
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ for the specified view span, including the appointment just
]]>
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [
<Para>In the
<Literal>&minus;w</Literal> option, it may be necessary to
<Literal>-w</Literal> option, it may be necessary to
escape the &bsol; character (``&bsol;&bsol;n'') or enclose
the string in quotes
to avoid interpretation by the shell.
@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Appointments for Monday February 27, 1995:
<Para>To insert at a specific time:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert &minus;s "11:00 am"
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert -s "11:00 am"
Appointments for Tuesday September 25, 1990:
1) Appointment
2) 11:00am-12:00pm Appointment
@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ Appointments for Tuesday September 25, 1990:
<Para>To insert at a specific start and end time:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert &minus;s "11:00 am" &minus;e 11:28am
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert -s "11:00 am" -e 11:28am
Appointments for Tuesday September 25, 1990:
1) Appointment
2) 11:00am-11:28am Appointment
@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Appointments for Tuesday September 25, 1990:
<Para>To insert at a specific time and date:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert &minus;s 11:00am &minus;d 09/26/90
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert -s 11:00am -d 09/26/90
Appointments for Wednesday September 26, 1990:
1) 11:00am-12:00pm Appointment
</ProgramListing>
@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Appointments for Wednesday September 26, 1990:
<Para>To insert at a specific time, date, and message:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert &minus;s "11:00 am" &minus;d 09/26/90 &minus;w "call home"
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert -s "11:00 am" -d 09/26/90 -w "call home"
Appointments for Wednesday September 26, 1990:
1) 11:00am-12:00pm Appointment
2) 11:00am-12:00pm call home
@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Appointments for Wednesday September 26, 1990:
<Para>To insert a multiple-line appointment:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert &minus;s 12:00 &minus;w "call dentist&bsol;n
<ProgramListing>dtcm_insert -s 12:00 -w "call dentist&bsol;n
no thanks&bsol;ncancel appointment"
Appointments for Tuesday September 25, 1990:
1) Appointment

24
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/cm_looku.sgm
View file

@ -26,9 +26,9 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtcm_lookup</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;c&numsp;<Replaceable>calendar</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;d&numsp;<Replaceable>date</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;v&numsp;<Replaceable>view</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-c&numsp;<Replaceable>calendar</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-d&numsp;<Replaceable>date</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-v&numsp;<Replaceable>view</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ used to look up appointments from the calendar
of the command-line options.
The current list of appointments for the specified date
(see the
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> and
<Literal>&minus;v</Literal> options) is displayed.
<Literal>-d</Literal> and
<Literal>-v</Literal> options) is displayed.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ The current list of appointments for the specified date
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;c&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>calendar</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-c&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>calendar</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the name of the target calendar.
Calendar names
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ the current user at the current host machine.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>date</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-d&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>date</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the date for the look up query.
The
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ are correctly calculated.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>view</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v&numsp;</Literal><Emphasis>view</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specify the view span of appointments to display.
The
@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ The
<Term><Literal>day</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Display all appointments for the given date (see
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> option).
<Literal>-d</Literal> option).
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Appointments for Tuesday March 29, 1994:
<Para>To look up entries for a specific date:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_lookup &minus;d 03/29/94
<ProgramListing>dtcm_lookup -d 03/29/94
Appointments for Wednesday March 30, 1994:
1) 11:00am-12:00pm Appointment
2) 11:30am-12:30pm Group Lunch
@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Appointments for Wednesday March 30, 1994:
<Para>To look up entries from a specific target calendar:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_lookup &minus;c felix@cat
<ProgramListing>dtcm_lookup -c felix@cat
Appointments for Tuesday March 29, 1994:
1) Appointment
2) 10:15am-10:30am Coffee
@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Appointments for Tuesday March 29, 1994:
<Para>To look up an entire week's appointments:
</Para>
<InformalExample Remap="indent">
<ProgramListing>dtcm_lookup &minus;v week
<ProgramListing>dtcm_lookup -v week
Appointments for Sunday March 27, 1994:
1) 6:00am-5:00pm Hiking
Appointments for Monday March 28, 1994:

94
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/codegen.sgm
View file

@ -15,35 +15,35 @@ a &str-XZ; application building services project or module file</refpurpose>
1995 International Business Machines Corp.--><!-- (c) Copyright 1993, 1994,
1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.--><!-- (c) Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Novell,
Inc.--><refsynopsisdiv><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtcodegen</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;changed</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;main</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;merge</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;nomerge</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;module&numsp;<replaceable>mymod</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;useWC&numsp;<replaceable>class</replaceable></arg>
<group><arg>&minus;p</arg><arg>&minus;project&numsp;<replaceable>myproj</replaceable></arg>
</group><group><arg>&minus;np</arg><arg>&minus;noproject</arg></group><arg
choice="opt">&minus;showall</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;noshowall</arg>
<group><arg>&minus;s</arg><arg>&minus;silent</arg></group><group><arg>&minus;v</arg><arg>&minus;verbose</arg></group><group><arg><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtcodegen</command><arg choice="opt">-changed</arg><arg choice="opt">-main</arg><arg choice="opt">-merge</arg><arg choice="opt">-nomerge</arg><arg choice="opt">-module&numsp;<replaceable>mymod</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-useWC&numsp;<replaceable>class</replaceable></arg>
<group><arg>-p</arg><arg>-project&numsp;<replaceable>myproj</replaceable></arg>
</group><group><arg>-np</arg><arg>-noproject</arg></group><arg
choice="opt">-showall</arg><arg choice="opt">-noshowall</arg>
<group><arg>-s</arg><arg>-silent</arg></group><group><arg>-v</arg><arg>-verbose</arg></group><group><arg><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
<arg>&numsp;.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</arg></group>
</cmdsynopsis>]]><![ %CDE.C.XO; [<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtcodegen</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;changed</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;main</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;merge</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;nomerge</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;showall</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;noshowall</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-changed</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-main</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-merge</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-nomerge</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-showall</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-noshowall</Arg>
<Group>
<Arg>&minus;s</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;silent</Arg>
<Arg>-s</Arg>
<Arg>-silent</Arg>
</Group>
<Group>
<Arg>&minus;v</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;verbose</Arg>
<Arg>-v</Arg>
<Arg>-verbose</Arg>
</Group>
<Arg><Replaceable>file</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>&numsp;.&thinsp;.&thinsp;.</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
]]>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtcodegen</command><arg>&minus;help</arg>
<command>dtcodegen</command><arg>-help</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv><refsect1>
<title>DESCRIPTION</title>
@ -61,43 +61,43 @@ the X Window System convention of full-word options.
]]>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;cha<?Pub Caret>nged</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-cha<?Pub Caret>nged</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Generate only source code for those modules that have changed since
the last time <command>dtcodegen</command> was run.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;help</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-help</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Write a help message to standard output explaining all <command>dtcodegen</command> options and then terminate.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;main</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-main</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Produce the project files associated with the application's <function>main</function> routine.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;merge</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-merge</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Merge generated stubs files with previous versions, perpetuating changes
made or custom edits done to the previous stubs file. This is the default
behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;nomerge</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-nomerge</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Do not merge existing and new <Filename>_stubs.c</Filename> files. This
option overrides the default merging behavior. If both <literal>&minus;merge</literal> and <literal>&minus;nomerge</literal> are used, the one given last
option overrides the default merging behavior. If both <literal>-merge</literal> and <literal>-nomerge</literal> are used, the one given last
on the command line takes precedence. <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;module&numsp;</literal><emphasis>mymod</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-module&numsp;</literal><emphasis>mymod</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Generate code for the module <emphasis>mymod</emphasis>, (which is expected
to be defined in the file <emphasis>mymod</emphasis> <Filename>.bil</Filename>). Using multiple <literal>&minus;module</literal> options includes
to be defined in the file <emphasis>mymod</emphasis> <Filename>.bil</Filename>). Using multiple <literal>-module</literal> options includes
multiple modules in the generated code.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;useWC&numsp;</literal><emphasis>class</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-useWC&numsp;</literal><emphasis>class</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Use the specified widget class whenever possible. Valid values are:
</para>
@ -116,13 +116,13 @@ widgets. This value retains the CDE 1.0 behavior.</para>
</variablelist>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;p&thinsp;|&thinsp;&minus;project&numsp;</literal> <emphasis>myproj</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-p&thinsp;|&thinsp;-project&numsp;</literal> <emphasis>myproj</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Generate code for the project <emphasis>myproj</emphasis>, (which is
expected to be defined in the file <emphasis>myproj</emphasis> <Filename>.bip</Filename>).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;noproject</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-noproject</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Ignore the <emphasis>project</emphasis><Filename>.bip</Filename> project
file and use default project settings instead. This is useful in producing
@ -130,33 +130,33 @@ an application from one or a few module files (for example, for testing) as
an alternative to generating the entire project. ]]></para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;showall</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-showall</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Cause the generated application to show (map) all application windows
(main windows and dialogs) at startup, ignoring whether they are set to be
initially visible or not. If no project is specified on the command line, <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [either
by using <literal>&minus;project</literal> or by specifying a <emphasis>project</emphasis> <Filename>.bip</Filename> file as an
operand, ]]><command>dtcodegen</command> performs as if <literal>&minus;showall</literal> had been specified. (The <literal>&minus;noshowall</literal> option
by using <literal>-project</literal> or by specifying a <emphasis>project</emphasis> <Filename>.bip</Filename> file as an
operand, ]]><command>dtcodegen</command> performs as if <literal>-showall</literal> had been specified. (The <literal>-noshowall</literal> option
suppresses this behavior).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;noshowall</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-noshowall</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Cause the generated application to show at startup (map) only those
windows (main windows and dialogs) whose initially visible attribute is true.
If a project is specified on the command line, <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [either by
using <literal>&minus;project</literal> or by specifying a <emphasis>project</emphasis> <Filename>.bip</Filename> file as an operand, ]]> <command>dtcodegen</command> performs as if <literal>&minus;noshowall</literal> had
been specified. (The <literal>&minus;showall</literal> option suppresses this
using <literal>-project</literal> or by specifying a <emphasis>project</emphasis> <Filename>.bip</Filename> file as an operand, ]]> <command>dtcodegen</command> performs as if <literal>-noshowall</literal> had
been specified. (The <literal>-showall</literal> option suppresses this
behavior).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;s&thinsp;|&thinsp;&minus;silent</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-s&thinsp;|&thinsp;-silent</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Work silently, producing no output except error messages while generating
source code.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;v&thinsp;|&thinsp;&minus;verbose</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-v&thinsp;|&thinsp;-verbose</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Be more verbose in providing progress and status messages during the
generation of source code.</para>
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ used.</para>]]><![ %CDE.C.XO; [</Para>
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>]]></refsect1><refsect1>
<title>RESOURCES</title>
<para>If the <literal>&minus;useWC</literal> option is not specified, <command>dtcodegen</command> uses the <literal>useWidgetClass</literal> resource in
<para>If the <literal>-useWC</literal> option is not specified, <command>dtcodegen</command> uses the <literal>useWidgetClass</literal> resource in
the Xt resources table to determine which class to use for generated widgets.
The class/type is <Symbol>XmCUseWidgetClass</Symbol>/<Symbol>XtEnum</Symbol> and the valid
values are:</para>
@ -260,11 +260,11 @@ written to standard output.</para>
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<para>The <command>dtcodegen</command> utility takes the
standard action for all signals.</para>]]></refsect1><refsect1>
<title>STDOUT</title>
<para>When <literal>&minus;help</literal> is specified, <command>dtcodegen</command> writes to standard output a usage message in an unspecified format.
<para>When <literal>-help</literal> is specified, <command>dtcodegen</command> writes to standard output a usage message in an unspecified format.
Otherwise, standard output is not used.</para>
</refsect1><refsect1>
<title>STDERR</title>
<para>When <literal>&minus;verbose</literal> is specified, <command>dtcodegen</command> writes to standard error informational progress messages
<para>When <literal>-verbose</literal> is specified, <command>dtcodegen</command> writes to standard error informational progress messages
and diagnostic messages in an unspecified format.
Otherwise, standard error is used only for diagnostic messages.</para>
</refsect1><refsect1>
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ that are common across interfaces.</para>
<para>A record of per-module code generation and the date and time of
each module as it was processed.
This data is required to provide support for the
<literal>&minus;changed</literal> option as part of determining which files
<literal>-changed</literal> option as part of determining which files
need to be regenerated and
which ones do not.</para>
</listitem>
@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ project file
<literal>myproject.bip</literal>:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting><![ %CDE.C.XO; [dtcodegen myproject.bip
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [dtcodegen &minus;p myproject
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [dtcodegen -p myproject
]]></programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>Run the code generator for the project
@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ for a project file that
references the module
<literal>mymodule</literal> and then silently generate code for just that
module:</para><informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>dtcodegen &minus;silent mymodule</programlisting>
<programlisting>dtcodegen -silent mymodule</programlisting>
</informalexample><para>In the following example:</para><informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>dtcodegen name1 name2</programlisting>
</informalexample><para>if the project file
@ -420,15 +420,15 @@ for the project
<Filename>myproject.c</Filename> and
<Filename>myproject.h</Filename>:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting><![ %CDE.C.XO; [dtcodegen &minus;main myproject-file
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [dtcodegen &minus;main &minus;p myproject
<programlisting><![ %CDE.C.XO; [dtcodegen -main myproject-file
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [dtcodegen -main -p myproject
]]></programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>Search the current working directory for a project file and,
if one is found, generate code for only those modules that have changed
since the code generator was last run:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>dtcodegen &minus;changed</programlisting>
<programlisting>dtcodegen -changed</programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>Generate, for the project
<![ %CDE.C.XO; [in file
@ -439,8 +439,8 @@ set
<literal>module3</literal> that have changed since the last time the code
generator was run:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting><![ %CDE.C.XO; [dtcodegen &minus;changed myproject.bip module1 module2 module3
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [dtcodegen &minus;changed &minus;p myproject module1 module2 module3
<programlisting><![ %CDE.C.XO; [dtcodegen -changed myproject.bip module1 module2 module3
]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [dtcodegen -changed -p myproject module1 module2 module3
]]></programlisting>
</informalexample>
</refsect1><refsect1>

20
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/config.sgm
View file

@ -29,11 +29,11 @@
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtconfig</Command>
<Group>
<Arg>&minus;d</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;e</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;kill</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;reset</Arg>
<Arg>&minus;p</Arg>
<Arg>-d</Arg>
<Arg>-e</Arg>
<Arg>-kill</Arg>
<Arg>-reset</Arg>
<Arg>-p</Arg>
</Group>
<!--- -->
<!--- -->
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ required to use
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;d</Term>
<Term>-d</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Disables desktop auto-start feature. At end of boot cycle, platform's native
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ text based login mechanism will be used.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;e</Term>
<Term>-e</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Enable's desktop auto-start feature. Desktop login window will display at end
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ of platform's boot cycle.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;kill</Term>
<Term>-kill</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Kill desktop (window based) login process and any user sessions associated with
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ it. Return control to system's native text based console.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;reset</Term>
<Term>-reset</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Tell desktop (window based) login process to reread its configuration files
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ to incorporate any changes.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;p</Term>
<Term>-p</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Printer actions for any printer known to platform will be created if such print

38
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/docbook.sgm
View file

@ -13,9 +13,9 @@
to SDL translator</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtdocbook</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;c</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;d</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;m</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;o <replaceable>file</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;r</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;s <replaceable>dir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;u</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;v</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;x</arg><arg><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtdocbook</command><arg choice="opt">-c</arg><arg choice="opt">-d</arg><arg choice="opt">-h</arg><arg choice="opt">-m</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-o <replaceable>file</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-r</arg><arg choice="opt">-s <replaceable>dir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-u</arg><arg choice="opt">-v</arg><arg choice="opt">-x</arg><arg><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -45,18 +45,18 @@ or <filename>.sdl</filename>, <command>dtdocbook</command> assumes they are
the file name extension removes them to create the base name for all intermediate
files and for the final output file. If the file name does not end in the
characters <filename>.sgm</filename> or <filename>.sdl</filename>, <command>dtdocbook</command> uses the file name as given for the base name. If you
request either compression or decompression (<literal>&minus;c</literal>
or <literal>&minus;d</literal> option) of an existing SDL file, the input
file name extension will be <filename>.sdl</filename>. If you specify neither <literal>&minus;c</literal> nor <literal>&minus;d</literal>, the input file name extension
request either compression or decompression (<literal>-c</literal>
or <literal>-d</literal> option) of an existing SDL file, the input
file name extension will be <filename>.sdl</filename>. If you specify neither <literal>-c</literal> nor <literal>-d</literal>, the input file name extension
must be <filename>.sgm</filename>. The output file name extension will always
be <filename>.sdl</filename> unless you specify the <literal>&minus;o</literal>
be <filename>.sdl</filename> unless you specify the <literal>-o</literal>
option, in which case <command>dtdocbook</command> will use the output filename
that you specify.</para>
<para>If you specify the <literal>&minus;c</literal> option and the file is
<para>If you specify the <literal>-c</literal> option and the file is
already compressed, <command>dtdocbook</command> will decompress and recompress
the file. This is a convenient way to verify the integrity of a compressed
SDL file.</para>
<para>If you specify the <literal>&minus;c</literal>
<para>If you specify the <literal>-c</literal>
option and the file is already decompressed,
<command>dtdocbook</command> will re-parse the file,
repeat all precomputations, and
@ -73,39 +73,39 @@ file.</para>
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;c</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-c</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Compresses an existing SDL file. This option
assumes an
input file name extension of <filename>.sdl</filename>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;d</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-d</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Decompresses an existing SDL file. This option
assumes an
input file name extension of <filename>.sdl</filename>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Outputs a summary of the command and its options
to standard output.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;m</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-m</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Adds additional SDATA and/or character mapping
files.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;o</literal> <emphasis>file</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-o</literal> <emphasis>file</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Uses the specified filename for the output file
and does not add any file name extension.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;r</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-r</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Removes any intermediate files and the output
file. If none exist,
@ -113,24 +113,24 @@ file. If none exist,
message.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;s</literal> <emphasis>dir</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-s</literal> <emphasis>dir</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtdocbook</command> to find the DocBook SGML declaration
and associated files in the specified directory.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;u</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-u</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Turns off compression for the output file during translation.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;v</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-v</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtdocbook</command> to generate and display parser
messages during processing (verbose mode).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;x</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-x</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Retains intermediate files when finished. This option is used primarily
for debugging <command>dtdocbook</command> itself.</para>

8
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/exec.sgm
View file

@ -28,9 +28,9 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtexec</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;open<Replaceable>open_option</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;ttprocid<Replaceable>procid</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;tmp<Replaceable>tmpfile</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-open<Replaceable>open_option</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-ttprocid<Replaceable>procid</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-tmp<Replaceable>tmpfile</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>cmd</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt"><Replaceable>cmd_arg ...</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ action service, which then invokes
<Command>dtexec</Command> as needed.
Applications should use the
<Literal>waitTime</Literal> resource to configure the value of the
<Emphasis>&minus;open_option</Emphasis> and the <Literal>DtexecPath</Literal> resource to configure
<Emphasis>-open_option</Emphasis> and the <Literal>DtexecPath</Literal> resource to configure
the location of
<Command>dtexec</Command>.</Para>
<Para>If <Emphasis>cmd</Emphasis> writes to stderr, the error messages are time stamped

14
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/he_htag2.sgm
View file

@ -59,18 +59,18 @@ The options to
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;c:</Term>
<Term>-c:</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>compress the SDL document on a per virtual page basis &minus; if
<Para>compress the SDL document on a per virtual page basis - if
the document is already compressed, this command will result
in no change to the document.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;d:</Term>
<Term>-d:</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>decompress an SDL document &minus; if the document is already
<Para>decompress an SDL document - if the document is already
compressed, this command will result in no change to the
document; however, the byte offsets of virtual pages will be
recomputed.
@ -78,14 +78,14 @@ recomputed.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;h:</Term>
<Term>-h:</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>print a help message and exit.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;o:</Term>
<Term>-o:</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>perform peephole optimization of the SDL document.
In
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ single <Literal>&lt;BLOCK></Literal> or <Literal>&lt;FORM></Literal> with the id
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;t:</Term>
<Term>-t:</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>eliminate any <Literal>&lt;TOSS></Literal> sub-elements that are not used in this SDL
document.

28
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/hello.sgm
View file

@ -14,13 +14,13 @@ transitional greeting</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dthello</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;display <replaceable>&lt;display></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;fground <replaceable>&lt;color></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;bground <replaceable>&lt;color></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;font <replaceable>&lt;fontname></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;string <replaceable>&lt;message></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;file <replaceable>&lt;filename></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;timeout <replaceable>&lt;seconds></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-display <replaceable>&lt;display></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-fground <replaceable>&lt;color></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-bground <replaceable>&lt;color></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-font <replaceable>&lt;fontname></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-string <replaceable>&lt;message></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-file <replaceable>&lt;filename></replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-timeout <replaceable>&lt;seconds></replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -43,44 +43,44 @@ is not intended to be started directly by users.
</para>
</note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;display</literal> <emphasis>display</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-display</literal> <emphasis>display</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Display id.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;fground</literal> <emphasis>color</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-fground</literal> <emphasis>color</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Foreground color.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;bground</literal> <emphasis>color</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-bground</literal> <emphasis>color</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Background color.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;font</literal> <emphasis>fontname</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-font</literal> <emphasis>fontname</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Font.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;string</literal> <emphasis>message</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-string</literal> <emphasis>message</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>String to be displayed in window.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;file</literal> <emphasis>filename</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-file</literal> <emphasis>filename</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Text file name whose contents will be displayed in window.
This option may be specified up to five times.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;timeout</literal> <emphasis>seconds</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-timeout</literal> <emphasis>seconds</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Number of seconds before giving up on the window manager
and terminating.

24
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/helpgen.sgm
View file

@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dthelpgen</Command>
<Arg>&minus;dir<Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg>-dir<Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt"><Replaceable>options</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ browser
volume is placed in the user's
<Filename>$HOME/.dt/help/$DTUSERSESSION</Filename> directory.
When running
<Command>dthelpgen</Command> from a terminal window, the &minus;dir option must be used to specify
<Command>dthelpgen</Command> from a terminal window, the -dir option must be used to specify
the location to create the resulting
browser
file.
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ file.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;generate</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-generate</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies that
<Command>dthelpgen</Command> unconditionally regenerate the
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ without first checking if new families or help volumes are present.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;dir</Literal> <Emphasis>directory</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-dir</Literal> <Emphasis>directory</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies the directory to deposit the generated files.
The specification can use substitution values.
@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ If the environment variable
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;file</Literal> <Emphasis>basename</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-file</Literal> <Emphasis>basename</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies the base name for the files generated by
<Command>dthelpgen</Command>. The default
@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ volume.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;lang</Literal> <Symbol Role="Variable">language</Symbol></Term>
<Term><Literal>-lang</Literal> <Symbol Role="Variable">language</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies which language directories to search for
help
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ help volumes.
If this option is not set, the default
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">LANG</SystemItem> value is used.
If the
<Literal>&minus;lang</Literal> value is set, it takes precedence over the current environment's
<Literal>-lang</Literal> value is set, it takes precedence over the current environment's
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">LANG</SystemItem> setting.
</Para>
</ListItem>
@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ for the caller.
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>Unable to access current working directory - error status number value</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Indicates that the &minus;dir option was specified with a relative path and that
<Para>Indicates that the -dir option was specified with a relative path and that
<Command>dthelpgen</Command> is unable to get the current working directory.
</Para>
</ListItem>
@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ for the caller.
<ListItem>
<Para>Missing
<Emphasis>directory</Emphasis> value for
<Literal>&minus;dir</Literal> option.
<Literal>-dir</Literal> option.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ for the caller.
<Term><Literal>Invalid system language specified</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Non-supported value used with the
<Literal>&minus;lang</Literal> option.
<Literal>-lang</Literal> option.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ for the caller.
<Title>EXAMPLES</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>dthelpgen &minus;dir $HOME/.dt/help</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>dthelpgen -dir $HOME/.dt/help</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Creates, if required, a new
browser
@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ help volume in the users home directory under <Literal>.dt/help/</Literal>.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>dthelpview &minus;dir $HOME/.dt/help -generate</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>dthelpview -dir $HOME/.dt/help -generate</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Forces the creation of a new
browser

152
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/helpprin.sgm
View file

@ -27,63 +27,63 @@ print utility for DtHelpDialog and DtHelpQuickDialog widgets</refpurpose>
<colspec align="left" colwidth="269*">
<tbody>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;helpType</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-helpType</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">type</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">type of Help data</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;helpType</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-helpType</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">type</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">type of Help data. type = 0 (help volume),
1 (string), 2 (man page), 3 (help file)</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-helpVolume</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">volume</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">full path of Help volume file.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;locationId</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-locationId</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">location</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">name of Help topic in the volume.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;allTopics</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-allTopics</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">print all topics, toc, &amp; index.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;subTopics</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-subTopics</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">print topic locationId and all subtopics.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;oneTopic</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-oneTopic</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">print topic locationId.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;toc</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-toc</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">print Help volume table of contents.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;index</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-index</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">print Help volume index.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;frontMatter</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-frontMatter</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">print Help volume front matter.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;manPage</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-manPage</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">manpagename</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">name of man page.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;stringData</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-stringData</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">string</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">Help text to print.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;helpFile</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-helpFile</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">filename</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">file containing Help text.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;topicTitle</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-topicTitle</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">title</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">title string for Help text.</entry></row>
</tbody></tgroup><?Pub Caret></informaltable>
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ print utility for DtHelpDialog and DtHelpQuickDialog widgets</refpurpose>
<colspec align="left" colwidth="284*">
<tbody>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;printer</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-printer</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">printername</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">printer to use</entry></row>
<row>
@ -104,36 +104,36 @@ print utility for DtHelpDialog and DtHelpQuickDialog widgets</refpurpose>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">number</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">number of copies to print.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;outputFile</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-outputFile</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">filename</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">write output to this file.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;paperSize</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-paperSize</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">size</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">format content to this paper size.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;paperSize</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-paperSize</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">size</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">format content to this paper size. size =
{help_papersize_letter|help_papersize_legal| help_papersize_executive|help_papersize_a4|
help_papersize_b5}</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;display</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-display</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">displayname</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">display from which to get resources.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;name</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-name</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">program name used when getting resources.</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;class</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-class</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">class name used when getting resources.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>&minus;xrm</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><literal>-xrm</literal></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><symbol role="Variable">resourcestring</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">additional resources.</entry></row></tbody>
</tgroup></informaltable>
@ -171,14 +171,14 @@ values from those given below. See the <literal>RESOURCE OVERVIEW</literal>
heading in this manual page for more information.</para>
<para>Options controlling what to print:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;helpType</literal> <symbol role="Variable">type</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-helpType</literal> <symbol role="Variable">type</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>The type of Help data to print. This is a numeric value, as follows:
0=help volume, 1=string, 2=man page, 3=help file. The default value is 0,
a Help volume.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal> <symbol role="Variable">volume</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-helpVolume</literal> <symbol role="Variable">volume</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>The name of the volume holding the topics to be printed.
If <symbol role="Variable">volume</symbol> is unqualified, the standard &cdeman.dthelpview;
@ -186,120 +186,120 @@ search paths are used to locate the volume; these are also covered in the
<literal>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</literal> heading in this manual page. The volume may
also be specified relative to the current directory by beginning the volume
name with "./" or "../". This option is useful only in conjunction with a
<literal>&minus;helpType</literal> of 0 (zero).</para>
<literal>-helpType</literal> of 0 (zero).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;locationId</literal> <symbol role="Variable">location</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-locationId</literal> <symbol role="Variable">location</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>The starting topic for processing topics of a Help volume.
The <symbol role="Variable">location</symbol> must be a text string used by the
author to mark a location
in the volume. The default value is <literal>_hometopic</literal>, which is
the top topic of a CDE Help volume. This option is useful only in conjunction
with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.</para>
with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;allTopics</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-allTopics</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dthelpprint</command> to print the entire help volume,
including front matter, table of contents, all topics, and an index. This
option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.
option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;subTopics</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-subTopics</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dthelpprint</command> to print the topic specified
by <literal>&minus;locationId</literal> and all the subtopics of that topic.
This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.</para>
by <literal>-locationId</literal> and all the subtopics of that topic.
This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;oneTopic</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-oneTopic</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dthelpprint</command> to print the topic specified
by <literal>-locationId</literal>. This option is useful only in conjunction
with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.</para>
with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;toc</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-toc</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dthelpprint</command> to print the Table of Contents
of the specified helpVolume. This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.</para>
of the specified helpVolume. This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;index</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-index</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dthelpprint</command> to print the Index of the specified
helpVolume. This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.</para>
helpVolume. This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;frontMatter</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-frontMatter</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dthelpprint</command> to print the front matter of
the specified helpVolume. Front matter includes the volume title, abstract,
and copyright information. This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>&minus;helpVolume</literal>.</para>
and copyright information. This option is useful only in conjunction with <literal>-helpVolume</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;stringData</literal> <symbol role="Variable">string</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-stringData</literal> <symbol role="Variable">string</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a string to print. This option is useful only in conjunction
with a <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> of 1.</para>
with a <literal>-helpType</literal> of 1.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;manPage</literal> <symbol role="Variable">manpagename</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-manPage</literal> <symbol role="Variable">manpagename</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the name of the Unix man page to print. This option is useful
only in conjunction with a <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> of 2.</para>
only in conjunction with a <literal>-helpType</literal> of 2.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;helpFile</literal> <symbol role="Variable">filename</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-helpFile</literal> <symbol role="Variable">filename</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a file to print. This option is useful only in conjunction
with a <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> of 3.</para>
with a <literal>-helpType</literal> of 3.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
<para>Options controlling how to print:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;printer</literal> <symbol role="Variable">printername</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-printer</literal> <symbol role="Variable">printername</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies which printer to use. If this isn't specified as a utility-line
option or resource, the default value is taken from the environment variable
<systemitem class="EnvironVar">LPDEST</systemitem>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;copies</literal> <symbol role="Variable">number</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-copies</literal> <symbol role="Variable">number</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies how many copies to produce. The default value is 1. This option
is only ignored when generating an output file.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;outputFile</literal> <symbol role="Variable">filename</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-outputFile</literal> <symbol role="Variable">filename</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a file to hold the print-ready output. If this option is specified,
no output is sent to the printer.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;paperSize</literal> <symbol role="Variable">size</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-paperSize</literal> <symbol role="Variable">size</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a size of paper to which the output should be formatted. There
are five valid values for <symbol role="Variable">size</symbol>: <literal>help_papersize_letter</literal>, <literal>help_papersize_legal</literal>, <literal>help_papersize_executive</literal>, <literal>help_papersize_a4</literal>, <literal>help_papersize_b5</literal>. The default value is <literal>help_papersize_letter</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;display</literal> <symbol role="Variable">displayname</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-display</literal> <symbol role="Variable">displayname</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the X display used to retrieve resource values. Typical format
for <emphasis>displayname</emphasis> is <literal>hostname:display_number.screen_number</literal>. If no screen number is specified, the first screen (0) is used.
See also <command>X</command>(1)</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;name</literal> <symbol role="Variable">name</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-name</literal> <symbol role="Variable">name</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the application name under which resources are to be obtained.
The default is <command>dthelpprint</command>. The resource <literal>application.name</literal> way also be used to specify the name.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;class</literal> <symbol role="Variable">classname</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-class</literal> <symbol role="Variable">classname</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the application class name under which resources are to be
obtained. The default is <command>dthelpprint</command>. The resource
@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ obtained. The default is <command>dthelpprint</command>. The resource
specify the class name.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;xrm</literal> <symbol role="Variable">resourcestring</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-xrm</literal> <symbol role="Variable">resourcestring</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies an addition to the resource database used by this invocation
of the program.</para>
@ -320,15 +320,15 @@ of the program.</para>
<para>The <command>dthelpprint</command> utility uses resources in addition
to utility-line options to configure its operation. There are many more resources
available for this purpose than utility-line options. To set a resource on
the utility line, use the <literal>&minus;xrm</literal> option.</para>
the utility line, use the <literal>-xrm</literal> option.</para>
<para>The application class is <command>dthelpprint</command> unless specified
otherwise with the <systemitem class="resource">application.class</systemitem> or
<systemitem class="resource">Application.Class</systemitem> resource or the
<literal>&minus;class</literal> option. The application
<literal>-class</literal> option. The application
instance name is the name used to run the program (usually <command>dthelpprint</command>)
unless specified otherwise with the <systemitem class="resource">application.class</systemitem> or
<systemitem class="resource">Application.Class</systemitem> resource
or the <literal>&minus;name</literal> option. In the following coverage of resource specifications,
or the <literal>-name</literal> option. In the following coverage of resource specifications,
the application's class name and instance name can be used interchangably;
however, if the same resource is specified more than once, the instance-specific
resource takes precedence over the class resource. In addition, when a value
@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ options, but also many others.</para>
<para>The <command>dthelpprint</command> utility allows printer-specific configurations
to be specified. The configuration used is controlled by the value of the
<systemitem class="resource">printer</systemitem> resource or
<literal>&minus;printer</literal> option.</para>
<literal>-printer</literal> option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
@ -1039,10 +1039,10 @@ precedence.</para>
<para>screen resources</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>$XENVIRONMENT or <literal>$HOME/.Xdefaults&minus;&lt;hostname></literal></para>
<para>$XENVIRONMENT or <literal>$HOME/.Xdefaults-&lt;hostname></literal></para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>utility&minus;line resources</para>
<para>utility-line resources</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</refsect1>
@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ used by <command>dthelpprint</command> to configure its operation.</para>
used.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates an invalid or missing value of the <literal>paperSize</literal>
resource or <literal>&minus;paperSize</literal> option. Specify the option
resource or <literal>-paperSize</literal> option. Specify the option
on the utility line or set a default resource value.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ value.</para>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Warning: Unable to open display &lt;display></literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates that the display specified by the <systemitem class="resource">display</systemitem>
resource or <literal>&minus;display</literal> option could not be opened.
resource or <literal>-display</literal> option could not be opened.
This means that the display's resources cannot be used to configure <command>dthelpprint</command>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ This means that the display's resources cannot be used to configure <command>dth
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: helpType is topic, but no helpVolume specified.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates that the <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> option was 0 (zero) or unspecified and defaulted
<para>Indicates that the <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or <literal>-helpType</literal> option was 0 (zero) or unspecified and defaulted
to 0 (zero) and no helpVolume was specified.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -1128,34 +1128,34 @@ unavailable or an error occurred while retrieving it from the volume.</para>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: helpType is string, but no stringData
specified.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> option is 1 (string) but no <systemitem class="resource">stringData</systemitem> resource
or <literal>&minus;stringData</literal> option was specified.</para>
<para>The <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or <literal>-helpType</literal> option is 1 (string) but no <systemitem class="resource">stringData</systemitem> resource
or <literal>-stringData</literal> option was specified.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: helpType is dynamic string, but no stringData
specified.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or
<literal>&minus;helpType</literal> option is 1 (dynamic string) but no
<literal>-helpType</literal> option is 1 (dynamic string) but no
<systemitem class="resource">stringData</systemitem>
resource or <literal>-stringData</literal> option was specified.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: helpType is man page, but no manPage specified.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <literal>helpType</literal> resource or <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> option is 2 (manual page) but no <literal>manPage</literal> resource
or <literal>&minus;manPage</literal> option was specified.</para>
<para>The <literal>helpType</literal> resource or <literal>-helpType</literal> option is 2 (manual page) but no <literal>manPage</literal> resource
or <literal>-manPage</literal> option was specified.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: helpType is file, but no helpFile specified.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <literal>helpType</literal> resource or <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> option is 3 (plain text file) but no <literal>helpFile</literal>
resource or <literal>&minus;helpFile</literal> option was specified.</para>
<para>The <literal>helpType</literal> resource or <literal>-helpType</literal> option is 3 (plain text file) but no <literal>helpFile</literal>
resource or <literal>-helpFile</literal> option was specified.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: Illegal helpType &lt;number>.</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or <literal>&minus;helpType</literal> option is not in the range 0 to 3.</para>
<para>The <systemitem class="resource">helpType</systemitem> resource or <literal>-helpType</literal> option is not in the range 0 to 3.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Error: unable to allocate memory for temporary
@ -1175,11 +1175,11 @@ file</literal></term>
</refsect1>
<refsect1>
<title>EXAMPLES</title>
<programlisting><literal>dthelpprint &minus;helpVolume Help4Help &minus;allTopics &minus;outputFile Help4Help.asc</literal>
dthelpprint &minus;helpVolume Help4Help &minus;toc &minus;index &minus;printer hplj3
dthelpprint &minus;helpType 1 &minus;stringData 'test string' &minus;printer hplj3
dthelpprint &minus;helpType 2 &minus;manPage grep &minus;outputFile grep.man
dthelpprint &minus;helpType 3 &minus;helpFile aFile &minus;printer hplj3
<programlisting><literal>dthelpprint -helpVolume Help4Help -allTopics -outputFile Help4Help.asc</literal>
dthelpprint -helpVolume Help4Help -toc -index -printer hplj3
dthelpprint -helpType 1 -stringData 'test string' -printer hplj3
dthelpprint -helpType 2 -manPage grep -outputFile grep.man
dthelpprint -helpType 3 -helpFile aFile -printer hplj3
</programlisting>
</refsect1>
<refsect1>

56
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/helptag.sgm
View file

@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
<Command>dthelptag</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">options</Arg>
<Arg><Replaceable>file</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt"><Replaceable>parser&minus;options</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt"><Replaceable>parser-options</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ argument has no periods,
and assumes an extension of <Filename>.htg</Filename>, <Filename>.ctg</Filename> or <Filename>.sdl</Filename>
for the input file.
The <Filename>.ctg</Filename>
extension is assumed when the <Literal>&minus;formal</Literal>
extension is assumed when the <Literal>-formal</Literal>
option described below is used.
The <Filename>.sdl</Filename>
extension is assumed when the <Literal>&minus;compress</Literal>
or <Literal>&minus;decompress</Literal>
extension is assumed when the <Literal>-compress</Literal>
or <Literal>-decompress</Literal>
option (described later in this document) is used.
</Para>
<Para>Several options to
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ parsing phase of the
<Command>dthelptag</Command> process may follow the file name.
</Para>
<Para>The output file is:
<Symbol Role="Variable">file</Symbol>.sdl &minus; the compiled help volume file.
<Symbol Role="Variable">file</Symbol>.sdl - the compiled help volume file.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
<RefSect1>
@ -83,18 +83,18 @@ parsing phase of the
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;verbose</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-verbose</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;verbose</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-verbose</Literal>
option will cause
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to generate and display parser messages during processing.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;formal</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-formal</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;formal</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-formal</Literal>
option causes
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to accept a subset of the HelpTag language that is strictly compliant
to canonical SGML.
@ -106,9 +106,9 @@ input file becomes <Filename>.ctg</Filename>.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;nooptimize</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-nooptimize</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;nooptimize</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-nooptimize</Literal>
option eliminates certain optimizations that normally take place
during translation of HelpTag markup to the runtime format.
Using
@ -117,9 +117,9 @@ this option speeds the translation process.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;clean</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-clean</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;clean</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-clean</Literal>
option causes
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to simply remove any intermediate files from the current directory.
No translation takes place.
@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ No translation takes place.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;debug</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-debug</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;debug</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-debug</Literal>
option causes
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to leave all intermediate files in the current directory.
The <Literal>&minus;debug</Literal>
The <Literal>-debug</Literal>
option also blocks the compression step of
<Command>dthelptag</Command>, leaving the resulting <Filename>.sdl</Filename>
output file in a human-readable form.
@ -140,9 +140,9 @@ output file in a human-readable form.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;files</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-files</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;files</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-files</Literal>
option causes a list of files referenced in the translation process to
be emitted to the standard output.
No translation takes place.
@ -150,18 +150,18 @@ No translation takes place.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;help</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-help</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;help</Literal> option causes
<Para>The <Literal>-help</Literal> option causes
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to emit a synopsis of the
<Command>dthelptag</Command> command line and a list of options to the standard output.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;decompress</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-decompress</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;decompress</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-decompress</Literal>
option causes
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to decompress a previously created <Filename>.sdl</Filename>
file.
@ -170,15 +170,15 @@ When this option is specified, the default input extension is <Filename>.sdl</Fi
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;compress</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-compress</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The <Literal>&minus;compress</Literal>
<Para>The <Literal>-compress</Literal>
option causes
<Command>dthelptag</Command> to compress a <Filename>.sdl</Filename>
file that either was created by translating a <Filename>.htg</Filename>
or <Filename>.ctg</Filename>
file using the <Literal>&minus;debug</Literal>
option or was previously decompressed using the <Literal>&minus;decompress</Literal>
file using the <Literal>-debug</Literal>
option or was previously decompressed using the <Literal>-decompress</Literal>
option.
When this option is specified, the default input extension is <Filename>.sdl</Filename>.
</Para>
@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ may be specified, but the last entry will override any previous setting.
<ListItem>
<Para>Neither the <Literal>shortfiles</Literal> <Emphasis>parser-option</Emphasis>
nor any of its synonyms should be used.
Rather, the <Literal>&minus;shortfiles</Literal>
Rather, the <Literal>-shortfiles</Literal>
option should be given as an <Emphasis>option</Emphasis>
to
<Command>dthelptag</Command>. The
@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ file described in the <Emphasis>CDE Help System Author's and Programmer's Guide<
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>file.ctg</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Default input file when the <Literal>&minus;formal</Literal>
<Para>Default input file when the <Literal>-formal</Literal>
option has been specified.
</Para>
</ListItem>

16
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/helpview.sgm
View file

@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ of the standard CDE general Help and quick Help dialog widgets.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;helpVolume</Literal> <Emphasis>volume</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-helpVolume</Literal> <Emphasis>volume</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies the name of the <Literal>&lt;filename>.sdl</Literal> file you want to
view.
@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ has been properly registered, no path is required.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;locationId</Literal> <Emphasis>location_id</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-locationId</Literal> <Emphasis>location_id</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies the location ID representing the desired Help topic to be viewed.
By default, Helpview uses <Symbol>_HOMETOPIC</Symbol> if an ID is not specified.
@ -70,21 +70,21 @@ By default, Helpview uses <Symbol>_HOMETOPIC</Symbol> if an ID is not specified.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;file</Literal> <Symbol Role="Variable">file</Symbol></Term>
<Term><Literal>-file</Literal> <Symbol Role="Variable">file</Symbol></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies a particular ASCII text file to be displayed.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;manPage</Literal> <Emphasis>man_page</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-manPage</Literal> <Emphasis>man_page</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Specifies a particular man page to be displayed.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;man</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-man</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Displays a dialog that prompts for a man page to view,
then displays the requested man page.
@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Dthelpview*man_text.columns: 20
<Title>EXAMPLES</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>dthelpview &minus;helpVolume dtintro.sdl &minus;locationId _hometopic</Term>
<Term>dthelpview -helpVolume dtintro.sdl -locationId _hometopic</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Displays the topic associated with _hometopic in the Help
volume dtintor.sdl.
@ -221,14 +221,14 @@ volume dtintor.sdl.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>dthelpview &minus;file /etc/checklist</Term>
<Term>dthelpview -file /etc/checklist</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Displays the file /etc/checklist in a general Help dialog
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>dthelpview &minus;man grep</Term>
<Term>dthelpview -man grep</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Displays the grep man page in a quick Help dialog
</Para>

20
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/huffcode.sgm
View file

@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ Create optimized DtSearch compression/decompression tables
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>huffcode</command>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="plain">
<arg choice="plain">&minus;l<replaceable>lit_thresh</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;l&minus;</arg>
<arg choice="plain">-l<replaceable>lit_thresh</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-l-</arg>
</group></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;o</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-o</arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>huffile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>textfile</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ record, does not match the value in the decode module. The
the option name without white space.</para>
</note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">lit_thresh</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">lit_thresh</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the literal character's minimum threshold to the integer specified
by <Symbol Role="Variable">lit_thresh</Symbol>.
@ -114,14 +114,14 @@ in the encode table occurring with frequency less than or equal to
<Symbol Role="Variable">lit_thresh</Symbol> will be coded with the
literal character.
</para>
<para>If this option and the <literal>&minus;l&minus;</literal> option are
omitted, the default is <literal>&minus;l0</literal>, meaning that
<para>If this option and the <literal>-l-</literal> option are
omitted, the default is <literal>-l0</literal>, meaning that
literal coding is provided only for bytes that never occur (counts of
zero).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l&minus;</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l-</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Disables literal character encoding. Disabling literal character
encoding in corpa with unbalanced byte frequency distributions will lead
@ -129,13 +129,13 @@ to extremely long bit string codes. Most natural language text corpa
are represented by highly unbalanced frequency distributions so this
option is not recommended for most DtSearch applications.
</para>
<para>If this option and the <literal>&minus;l</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">lit_thresh</Symbol> option are omitted, the default is
<literal>&minus;l0</literal>, meaning that literal coding is provided
<para>If this option and the <literal>-l</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">lit_thresh</Symbol> option are omitted, the default is
<literal>-l0</literal>, meaning that literal coding is provided
only for bytes that never occur (counts of zero).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;o</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-o</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Suppresses the overwrite prompt. It preauthorizes erasure and
reinitialization of the decode module.

6
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/icon.sgm
View file

@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ below.
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<Para>The following options are available from the command line:
</Para>
<Para><Literal>&minus;f</Literal> <Emphasis>file</Emphasis></Para>
<Para><Literal>-f</Literal> <Emphasis>file</Emphasis></Para>
<Para>This option takes a bitmap or pixmap file name.
If the file ends in .pm or .xpm suffix, it will try reading it as an XPM
file first. If it fails, it will try reading it as an XBM file.
@ -102,12 +102,12 @@ file first. If it fails, it will try reading it as an XPM file.
If the file doesn't match any of these suffixes, it will try reading it
as an XPM file first. If it fails it will try reading it as an XBM file.
</Para>
<Para><Literal>&minus;x</Literal> <Emphasis>widthxheight</Emphasis></Para>
<Para><Literal>-x</Literal> <Emphasis>widthxheight</Emphasis></Para>
<Para>This option specifies an initial geometry for the icon image. If a
file is specified using the -f option, the size of that icon
supersedes the geometry specified.
</Para>
<Para><Literal>&minus;session</Literal> <Emphasis>file</Emphasis></Para>
<Para><Literal>-session</Literal> <Emphasis>file</Emphasis></Para>
<Para>This option takes the name of a session file as an additional
parameter. The Icon Editor is invoked with the specified session file
name. The session file is a file that was previously saved by the Icon

24
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/imsstart.sgm
View file

@ -13,8 +13,8 @@
an input method server</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtimsstart</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;env</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;ims <replaceable>name</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;shell <replaceable>name</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;host <replaceable>hostname</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;imsopt <replaceable>options</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;list</arg>
<command>dtimsstart</command><arg choice="opt">-env</arg><arg choice="opt">-ims <replaceable>name</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-shell <replaceable>name</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-host <replaceable>hostname</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-imsopt <replaceable>options</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-list</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ the selection window.</para>
</variablelist>
<refsect2>
<title>Remote Execution of IMS</title>
<para>If you use the <literal>&minus;host</literal> option to have <command>dtimsstart</command> start an IMS on a remote host, <command>dtimsstart</command>
<para>If you use the <literal>-host</literal> option to have <command>dtimsstart</command> start an IMS on a remote host, <command>dtimsstart</command>
does the following:</para>
<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Executes the <Symbol>DtImsGetRemoteConf</Symbol>
action to retrieve IMS configuration data from the specified remote system
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Desktop Environment: Advanced User's and System Administrator's Guide</emphasis>
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;env</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-env</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Outputs the contents of the <Symbol>XMODIFIERS</Symbol> environment
variable to stdout. <command>dtimsstart</command> automatically updates this
@ -83,31 +83,31 @@ that the intended IMS is the one that is being started. If you omit this
option, no output occurs.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;ims</literal> <emphasis>name</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-ims</literal> <emphasis>name</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>The name of the IMS to be started. If you specify this option, <command>dtimsstart</command> starts the IMS without displaying the selection window.
If you omit this option, <command>dtimsstart</command> displays the selection
window.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;shell</literal> <emphasis>name</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-shell</literal> <emphasis>name</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>The output format to use, of output, if <literal>&minus;env</literal>
<para>The output format to use, of output, if <literal>-env</literal>
is specified. If you omit this option, <command>dtimsstart</command> uses
the value of $SHELL as the default.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;host</literal> <emphasis>hostname</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-host</literal> <emphasis>hostname</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>The name of the host on which the IMS is to run. If you omit this option, <command>dtimsstart</command> uses the local host as the default.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;imsopt</literal> <emphasis>options</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-imsopt</literal> <emphasis>options</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>The command line options for the selected IMS.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;list</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-list</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtimsstart</command> to output the names of input
methods registered on the system and then exit immediately.</para>
@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ methods registered on the system and then exit immediately.</para>
<itemizedlist><listitem><para>The started IMS did not complete its initialization
within the timeout period.</para>
</listitem><listitem><para>The started IMS process aborted.</para>
</listitem><listitem><para>The IMS specified by the <literal>&minus;ims</literal>
</listitem><listitem><para>The IMS specified by the <literal>-ims</literal>
option is not registered.</para>
</listitem></itemizedlist>
</listitem>
@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ default is False.</para>
<varlistentry><term><literal>no_option</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>A Bool indicating whether the IMS allows the command-line option or
not. If True, any options specified by <literal>&minus;imsopt</literal> are
not. If True, any options specified by <literal>-imsopt</literal> are
ignored, though the value of the <literal>cmd_param</literal> entry is always
applied regardless of this value. It should be True for the local IMS. The
default is False.</para>

58
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/info.sgm
View file

@ -17,20 +17,20 @@
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfo</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;help</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;l <replaceable>infolib</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;sect <replaceable>section</replaceable>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="req" rep="repeat"><arg choice="plain">&minus;<replaceable>section</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-help</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-l <replaceable>infolib</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-sect <replaceable>section</replaceable>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="req" rep="repeat"><arg choice="plain">-<replaceable>section</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">,<replaceable>section</replaceable></arg>
</group></arg></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;secondary</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;verbose</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;print</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;hierarchy</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;printer <replaceable>x_print_server</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;copies <replaceable>number</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;paperSize <replaceable>size</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;s</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-secondary</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-verbose</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-print</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-hierarchy</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-printer <replaceable>x_print_server</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-copies <replaceable>number</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-paperSize <replaceable>size</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-s</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv><refsect1>
<title>DESCRIPTION</title>
@ -104,13 +104,13 @@ across sessions.
<para>The following options are available:
</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;help</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-help</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Prints a summary of the command's syntax.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l</literal> <symbol role="variable">infolib</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l</literal> <symbol role="variable">infolib</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies an absolute file path or the filename of an information library.
If an infolib's filename is specified, the search path specified by
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ This option can be specified more than once.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;secondary</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-secondary</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Starts a secondary instance of <command>dtinfo</command>. Secondary
instances do not respond to <symbol>Dtinfo_ShowInfoAtLoc</symbol>
@ -130,27 +130,27 @@ and <symbol>Dtinfo_LoadInfoLib</symbol> ToolTalk messages.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;verbose</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-verbose</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Prints information on the terminal as the command runs, if
<command>dtinfo</command> is started from the command line.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;sect</literal> <symbol role="variable">section</symbol>[{&minus;<symbol role="variable">section</symbol>|,<symbol role="variable">section</symbol>}&hellip;]</term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-sect</literal> <symbol role="variable">section</symbol>[{-<symbol role="variable">section</symbol>|,<symbol role="variable">section</symbol>}&hellip;]</term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the infolib section or sections to either display
or print. Sections can be specified in generalized locator format.
</para>
<para>To specify a range of sections, use the form:
</para>
<para><literal>&minus;sect</literal> <symbol role="variable">section</symbol><literal>-</literal><symbol role="variable">section</symbol>
<para><literal>-sect</literal> <symbol role="variable">section</symbol><literal>-</literal><symbol role="variable">section</symbol>
</para>
<para>where the start and end sections are separated by the hyphen character.
</para>
<para>To specify a discontiguous list of sections, use the form:
</para>
<para><literal>&minus;sect</literal> <symbol role="variable">section</symbol>,<symbol role="variable">section</symbol>
<para><literal>-sect</literal> <symbol role="variable">section</symbol>,<symbol role="variable">section</symbol>
</para>
<para>where the sections in the list are separated by the comma character.
</para>
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ all the sections in separate browser windows.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;print</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-print</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtinfo</command> to print the locations specified
with the <literal>-sect</literal> option. Printing of an entire infolib
@ -172,18 +172,18 @@ the top of a section, the section containing the location is printed.
</variablelist>
<refsect2>
<title>Print Control Options</title>
<para>These options are valid only if the <literal>&minus;print</literal>
<para>These options are valid only if the <literal>-print</literal>
option is also specified.
</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;hierarchy</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-hierarchy</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Prints an entire specified section and all of its subsections. By
default, only the specified section is printed.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;printer</literal> <symbol role="variable">x_print_server</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-printer</literal> <symbol role="variable">x_print_server</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies which X Print server to use. If this is not specified as a
command-line option or resource, the value is taken from the
@ -191,14 +191,14 @@ environment.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;copies</literal> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-copies</literal> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies how many copies to print. The default value is 1. This option
is ignored when generating an output file.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;paperSize</literal> <symbol role="variable">size</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-paperSize</literal> <symbol role="variable">size</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a size of paper to which the output should be formatted. Valid
sizes are <literal>iso-a4</literal>, <literal>iso-b4</literal>,
@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ sizes are <literal>iso-a4</literal>, <literal>iso-b4</literal>,
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;outputFile</literal> <symbol role="variable">filename</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-outputFile</literal> <symbol role="variable">filename</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a file to hold the print-ready output. If this option is
specified, no output is sent to the printer. If this
@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ option is specified, the <literal>-copies</literal> option is ignored.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;s</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-s</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies silent printing. <command>dtinfo</command> does not write to
either standard out or standard error, nor does it attempt to open any
@ -630,8 +630,8 @@ relative or absolute, for one or more information libraries.
</refsect1><refsect1>
<title>OUTPUT FILES</title>
<para>For output, <command>dtinfo</command> produces a file to hold
print-ready output, if the <literal>&minus;outputFile</literal> and the
<literal>&minus;print</literal> options are specified.
print-ready output, if the <literal>-outputFile</literal> and the
<literal>-print</literal> options are specified.
</para>
</refsect1><refsect1>
<title>EXTENDED DESCRIPTION</title>

66
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/infogen.sgm
View file

@ -17,46 +17,46 @@
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfogen</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-h</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfogen admin</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-h</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfogen build</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;l <replaceable>Library</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;d <replaceable>LibraryDescription</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;n <replaceable>LibraryShortName</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-l <replaceable>Library</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-d <replaceable>LibraryDescription</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-n <replaceable>LibraryShortName</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>Bookcase</replaceable> ...</arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfogen tocgen</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;id <replaceable>TOCid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;title <replaceable>TOCtitle</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-id <replaceable>TOCid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-title <replaceable>TOCtitle</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>document</replaceable> ...</arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;f <replaceable>TOCfile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-f <replaceable>TOCfile</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfogen update</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;b <replaceable>BookcaseName</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;l <replaceable>library</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-b <replaceable>BookcaseName</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-l <replaceable>library</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>stylesheet</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtinfogen validate</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-h</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-T <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-m <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>SGMLdocument</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
@ -109,11 +109,11 @@ DocBook.DTD.
<para>The following options are available:
</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h</literal></term>
<listitem><para>Displays a help message for each available option.
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;T</literal> <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-T</literal> <replaceable>TmpDir</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>Specifies the directory in which temporary files are placed during the
build process. The default is to use the environment variable
<systemitem class="environvar">TMPDIR</systemitem>. If variable
@ -122,25 +122,25 @@ build process. The default is to use the environment variable
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;m</literal> <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-m</literal> <replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>Specifies a catalog file conforming to the SGML Open specification for
resolving SGML entities. You can use multiple
<literal>&minus;m</literal> options to specify as many
<literal>-m</literal> options to specify as many
<replaceable>CatalogFile</replaceable>s as you wish.
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l</literal> <replaceable>Library</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l</literal> <replaceable>Library</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>Specifies the location of the information library to build.
<replaceable>Library</replaceable> is the name of the directory that
contains the built bookcase(s).
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;d</literal> <replaceable>LibraryDescription</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-d</literal> <replaceable>LibraryDescription</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para><replaceable>LibraryDescription</replaceable> is a brief description of
the information library to be built.
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;n</literal> <replaceable>LibraryShortName</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-n</literal> <replaceable>LibraryShortName</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para><replaceable>LibraryShortName</replaceable> specifies an abbreviated name for
the information library to be built.
</para></listitem>
@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ dtinfoBook.dtd.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;f</literal> <replaceable>TOCfile</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-f</literal> <replaceable>TOCfile</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>Specifies the SGML instance of a hypertext table of contents conforming
to the dtinfoTOC.dtd.
</para></listitem>
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ to the dtinfoTOC.dtd.
<listitem><para>A DocBook SGML source file.
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;b</literal> <replaceable>BookcaseName</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-b</literal> <replaceable>BookcaseName</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>The name of the bookcase whose style sheet information will be updated.
The content of the <Symbol>BOOKCASENAME</Symbol> element in the
dtinfoBook.dtd.
@ -174,12 +174,12 @@ dtinfoBook.dtd.
<listitem><para>Any SGML document to be validated.
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;id</literal> <replaceable>TOCid</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-id</literal> <replaceable>TOCid</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>The unique identifier of the hypertext table of contents
document.
</para></listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;title</literal> <replaceable>TOCtitle</replaceable></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-title</literal> <replaceable>TOCtitle</replaceable></term>
<listitem><para>The title of the table of contents. This title will be
displayed in the DtInfo Browser.
</para></listitem>

86
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/ksh.sgm
View file

@ -17,16 +17,16 @@ Format, Version 1.0.0--><!-- (c) Copyright
1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.--><!-- (c) Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Novell,
Inc.--><refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtksh</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;abCefimnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">+abCefmnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">+o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><group>
<command>dtksh</command><arg choice="opt">-abCefimnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">-o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">+abCefmnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">+o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><group>
<arg><replaceable>command_file</replaceable></arg><group><arg><replaceable>argument</replaceable></arg><arg>...</arg></group></group>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtksh</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;abCefimnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">+abCefmnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">+o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>command_string</replaceable></arg><group><arg><replaceable>command_name</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtksh</command><arg choice="opt">-abCefimnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">-o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">+abCefmnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">+o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>command_string</replaceable></arg><group><arg><replaceable>command_name</replaceable></arg>
<group><arg><replaceable>argument</replaceable></arg><arg>...</arg></group>
</group>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtksh</command><arg>&minus;s</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;abCefimnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtksh</command><arg>-s</arg><arg choice="opt">-abCefimnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">-o&numsp;<replaceable>option</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">+abeCefmnuvx</arg><arg choice="opt">+o&numsp; <replaceable>option</replaceable></arg><group><arg><replaceable>argument</replaceable></arg>
<arg>...</arg></group>
</cmdsynopsis>
@ -89,13 +89,13 @@ widget for information on the resources that apply to that widget.</para>
<para>The following information describes the environment variables that <command>dtksh</command> uses that are in addition to those documented in the manual
page for the <command>sh</command> command language interpreter.</para>
<refsect2>
<title>Immediate Return Value (&hairsp;&minus;&hairsp;)</title>
<title>Immediate Return Value (&hairsp;-&hairsp;)</title>
<para>Many of the category 3 commands (as described in <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [the <literal>Return Values From Built-in Commands</literal> section) ]]><![ %CDE.C.XO; [<xref
role="5" linkend="XCSA.MAN6.anch.1">) ]]>return a single value using an environment
variable specified as the first argument to the command (in the synopses for
these special commands, the first argument has the name <symbol role="Variable">variable</symbol>). If this return value is immediately used in an expression,
the special environment variable ``&minus;'' can be used in place of a variable
name. When <command>dtksh</command> encounters ``&minus;'' as the name of
the special environment variable ``-'' can be used in place of a variable
name. When <command>dtksh</command> encounters ``-'' as the name of
the environment variable in which the return value is to be returned, it returns
the result as the value of the command. This allows the shell script to embed
the command call in another command call. (This feature works only for commands
@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ XSync $DISPLAY true</programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>can be replaced by the equivalent:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>XSync $(XtDisplay "&minus;" $FORM) true</programlisting>
<programlisting>XSync $(XtDisplay "-" $FORM) true</programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>The reference to <emphasis>$DISPLAY</emphasis> is replaced with the
value returned by the call to <command>XtDisplay</command>. This capability
is available for all category 3 commands except those that create a widget,
those that return more than a single value and those whose first argument
is not named <symbol role="Variable">variable</symbol>. Commands that do not
accept ``&minus;'' as the environment variable name include: <command>XtInitialize</command>, <command>XtCreateApplicationShell</command>, <command>XtCreatePopupShell</command>, <command>XtCreateManagedWidget</command> and <command>XtCreateWidget</command>; all commands of the form:</para>
accept ``-'' as the environment variable name include: <command>XtInitialize</command>, <command>XtCreateApplicationShell</command>, <command>XtCreatePopupShell</command>, <command>XtCreateManagedWidget</command> and <command>XtCreateWidget</command>; all commands of the form:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>XmCreate...()</programlisting>
</informalexample>
@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ GC arguments</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>XDrawLines</command><arg><replaceable>display drawable</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>&minus;coordinateMode</replaceable></arg><arg
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>-coordinateMode</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt"><replaceable>optional GC arguments</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>x1 y1 x2 y2</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>x3 y3&numsp;...</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para><!--.VL 6-->The <emphasis>coordinateMode</emphasis> operand is either <systemitem class="Constant">CoordModeOrigin</systemitem> or <systemitem class="Constant">CoordModePrevious</systemitem>. <!--.LE--></para>
@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ choice="opt"><replaceable>optional GC arguments</replaceable></arg><arg><replace
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>XDrawPoints</command><arg><replaceable>display drawable</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>&minus;coordinateMode</replaceable></arg><arg
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>-coordinateMode</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt"><replaceable>optional GC arguments</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>x1 y1</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>x2 y2 x3 y3&numsp;...</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para><!--.VL 6-->The <emphasis>coordinateMode</emphasis> operand is either <systemitem class="Constant">CoordModeOrigin</systemitem> or <systemitem class="Constant">CoordModePrevious</systemitem>. <!--.LE--></para>
@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ choice="opt"><replaceable>optional GC arguments</replaceable></arg><arg><replace
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>XFillPolygon</command><arg><replaceable>display drawable</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>&minus;shape</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>&minus;coordinateMode</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>optional
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>-shape</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>-coordinateMode</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>optional
GC arguments</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>x1 y1 x2 y2&numsp;...</replaceable></arg>
<!-- -->
</cmdsynopsis>
@ -587,9 +587,9 @@ dtksh-command</replaceable></arg>
indicated file descriptor with the X Toolkit as an alternative input source
(that is, for reading). The input handler for the shell script is responsible
for unregistering the input source when it is no longer needed, and also to
close the file descriptor. If the <literal>&minus;r</literal> option is specified
close the file descriptor. If the <literal>-r</literal> option is specified
(raw mode), <command>dtksh</command> does not automatically read any of the
data available from the input source; it is up to the specified <command>dtksh</command> command to read all data. If the <literal>&minus;r</literal>
data available from the input source; it is up to the specified <command>dtksh</command> command to read all data. If the <literal>-r</literal>
option is not specified, the specified <command>dtksh</command> command is
invoked only when a full line has been read (that is, a line terminated by
either an unescaped <keysym>newline</keysym> character, or end-of-file) and
@ -2204,7 +2204,7 @@ get the message received and processed. The following code block demonstrates
how this is done:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>ttdt_open PROC_ID STATUS FID "Tool" "HP" "1.0" True
XtAddInput INPUT_ID &minus;r $FID "ProcessTTInput \"$PROC_ID\""
XtAddInput INPUT_ID -r $FID "ProcessTTInput \"$PROC_ID\""
ProcessTTInput()
{
tttk_Xt_input_handler $1 $INPUT_SOURCE $INPUT_ID
@ -2217,7 +2217,7 @@ was returned by the <command>ttdt_open</command> command. When registering <comm
be registered as a raw handler to prevent <command>dtksh</command> from automatically
breaking up the input into lines. This can be done as follows:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>XtAddInput returnId &minus;r $tt_fd \
<programlisting>XtAddInput returnId -r $tt_fd \
"tttk_Xt_input_handler \"$procId\""</programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>The \" characters before and after the reference to the <emphasis>procId</emphasis> environment variable are necessary to protect the embedded spaces
@ -2432,7 +2432,7 @@ state. If arguments are supplied, they should be either widget handles, or
the names of existing widgets; in this case, the information is written only
for the requested set of widgets. <!--.LE--></para>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>&minus;r</arg><group><arg><replaceable>widgetHandle</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>widgetClass</replaceable></arg>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>-r</arg><group><arg><replaceable>widgetHandle</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>widgetClass</replaceable></arg>
</group>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para><!--.VL 6-->If no arguments are supplied, the list of supported resources
@ -2441,7 +2441,7 @@ are supplied, they should be either widget handles, or the widget class names;
in this case, the information is written only for the requested set of widgets
or widget classes. <!--.LE--></para>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>&minus;R</arg><group><arg><replaceable>widgetHandle</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>widgetClass</replaceable></arg>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>-R</arg><group><arg><replaceable>widgetHandle</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>widgetClass</replaceable></arg>
</group>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para><!--.VL 6-->If no arguments are supplied, the list of supported constraint
@ -2450,13 +2450,13 @@ classes. If arguments are supplied, they should be either widget handles,
or the widget class names; in this case, the information is written only for
the requested set of widgets or widget classes. <!--.LE--></para>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>&minus;c</arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>widgetClass</replaceable></arg>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>-c</arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>widgetClass</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para><!--.VL 6-->If no arguments are supplied, the list of supported widget
class names is written to standard output. If arguments are supplied, <command>dtksh</command> writes the widget class name (if it is defined); otherwise,
it writes an error message to standard error. <!--.LE--></para>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>&minus;h</arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>widgetHandle</replaceable></arg>
<command>DtWidgetInfo</command><arg>-h</arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>widgetHandle</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para><!--.VL 6-->If no arguments are supplied, the list of active widget
handles is written to standard output. If arguments are supplied, they should
@ -2493,11 +2493,11 @@ buttons into a menupane or menubar.</para>
callback1</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>label2 callback2&numsp;...</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>DtkshAddButtons</command><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>&minus;w</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>parent widgetClass variable1 label1
<command>DtkshAddButtons</command><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>-w</replaceable></arg><arg><replaceable>parent widgetClass variable1 label1
callback1</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt"><replaceable>variable2 label2
callback2&numsp;...</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<para>The <literal>&minus;w</literal> option indicates that the convenience
<para>The <literal>-w</literal> option indicates that the convenience
function should return the widget handle for each of the buttons it creates.
The widget handle is returned in the specified environment variable. The
<symbol role="Globalvar">widgetClass</symbol> argument can be set to any one of the
@ -2510,7 +2510,7 @@ following, and defaults to <command>XmPushButtonGadget</command>, if not specifi
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>DtkshAddButtons $MENU XmPushButtonGadget Open do_Open Save \
do_Save Quit exit
DtkshAddButtons &minus;w $MENU XmPushButtonGadget B1 Open \
DtkshAddButtons -w $MENU XmPushButtonGadget B1 Open \
do_Open B2 Save do_Save</programlisting>
</informalexample>
</refsect2>
@ -3068,13 +3068,13 @@ SessionCallback()
exec 9>$PATH
# Save off whether we are currently in an iconified state
if DtShellIsIconified $TOPLEVEL; then
print &minus;u9 `Iconified'
print -u9 `Iconified'
else
print &minus;u9 `Deiconified'
print -u9 `Deiconified'
fi
# Save off the list of workspaces we currently reside in
if DtWsmGetWorkspacesOccupied $(XtDisplay "&minus;" $TOPLEVEL)
$(XtWindow "&minus;" $TOPLEVEL)
if DtWsmGetWorkspacesOccupied $(XtDisplay "-" $TOPLEVEL)
$(XtWindow "-" $TOPLEVEL)
CURRENT_WS_LIST;
then
# Map the comma-separated list of atoms into
@ -3083,9 +3083,9 @@ SessionCallback()
IFS=","
for item in $CURRENT_WS_LIST;
do
XmGetAtomName NAME $(XtDisplay "&minus;" $TOPLEVEL)
XmGetAtomName NAME $(XtDisplay "-" $TOPLEVEL)
$item
print &minus;u9 $NAME
print -u9 $NAME
done
IFS=$oldIFS
fi
@ -3096,7 +3096,7 @@ SessionCallback()
"/usr/dt/contrib/dtksh/SessionTest $SAVEFILE"
else
echo "DtSessionSavePath FAILED!!"
exit &minus;3
exit -3
fi
}
# Function invoked during a restore session; restores the
@ -3106,7 +3106,7 @@ RestoreSession()
# Retrieve the path where our session file resides
if DtSessionRestorePath $TOPLEVEL PATH $1; then
exec 9&lt;$PATH
read &minus;u9 ICONIFY
read -u9 ICONIFY
# Extract and restore our iconified state
case $ICONIFY in
Iconified) DtSetIconifyHint $TOPLEVEL True;;
@ -3116,11 +3116,11 @@ RestoreSession()
# them to atoms, and ask the workspace manager to relocate
# us to those workspaces
WS_LIST=""
while read &minus;u9 NAME
while read -u9 NAME
do
XmInternAtom ATOM $(XtDisplay "&minus;" $TOPLEVEL)
XmInternAtom ATOM $(XtDisplay "-" $TOPLEVEL)
$NAME False
if [ ${#WS_LIST} &minus;gt 0 ]; then
if [ ${#WS_LIST} -gt 0 ]; then
WS_LIST=$WS_LIST,$ATOM
else
WS_LIST=$ATOM
@ -3131,14 +3131,14 @@ RestoreSession()
exec 9&lt;&amp;-
else
echo "DtSessionRestorePath FAILED!!"
exit &minus;3
exit -3
fi
}
################## Create the Main UI #######################
XtInitialize TOPLEVEL wmProtTest Dtksh "$@"
XtCreateManagedWidget DA da XmDrawingArea $TOPLEVEL
XtSetValues $DA height:200 width:200
XmInternAtom SAVE_SESSION_ATOM $(XtDisplay "&minus;" $TOPLEVEL)
XmInternAtom SAVE_SESSION_ATOM $(XtDisplay "-" $TOPLEVEL)
"WM_SAVE_YOURSELF" False
# If a command-line argument was supplied, then treat it as the
# name of the session file
@ -3240,12 +3240,12 @@ a graphics context, or GC as an argument, in addition to the drawing data.
In <command>dtksh</command> drawing functions, a collection of GC options
are specified in the argument list to the command. By default, the drawing
commands create a GC that is used for that specific command and then discarded.
If the script specifies the <literal>&minus;gc</literal> option, the name
If the script specifies the <literal>-gc</literal> option, the name
of the graphics context object can be passed to the command; this GC is used
in interpreting the command, and the variable is updated with any modifications
to the GC performed by the command.</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;gc</literal> <structname role="typedef">GC</structname></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-gc</literal> <structname role="typedef">GC</structname></term>
<listitem>
<para><structname role="typedef">GC</structname> is the name of an environment
variable that has not yet been initialized, or which has been left holding
@ -3254,35 +3254,35 @@ it must be the first <structname role="typedef">GC</structname> option specified
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;foreground</literal> <symbol role="Variable">color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-foreground</literal> <symbol role="Variable">color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Foreground color, which can be either the name of a color or a pixel
number.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;background</literal> <symbol role="Variable">color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-background</literal> <symbol role="Variable">color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Background color, which can be either the name of a color or a pixel
number.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;font</literal> <emphasis>font name</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-font</literal> <emphasis>font name</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Name of the font to be used.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;line_width</literal> <emphasis>number</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-line_width</literal> <emphasis>number</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Line width to be used during drawing.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;function</literal> <emphasis>drawing function</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-function</literal> <emphasis>drawing function</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Drawing function, which can be any of the following: <literal>xor</literal>, <literal>or</literal>, <literal>clear</literal>, <literal>and</literal>, <literal>copy</literal>, <literal>noop</literal>, <literal>nor</literal>, <literal>nand</literal>, <literal>set</literal>, <literal>invert</literal>, <literal>equiv</literal>, <literal>andReverse</literal>, <literal>orReverse</literal>
or <literal>copyInverted</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;line_style</literal> <symbol role="Variable">style</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-line_style</literal> <symbol role="Variable">style</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Line style, which can be any of the following: <systemitem class="Constant">LineSolid</systemitem>, <systemitem class="Constant">LineDoubleDash</systemitem>
or <systemitem class="Constant">LineOnOffDash</systemitem>.</para>

34
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/login.sgm
View file

@ -13,10 +13,10 @@
service </refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtlogin</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;config<replaceable>configuration_file</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;daemon</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;debug<replaceable>debug_level</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;error<replaceable>error_log_file</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;quiet</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;nodaemon</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;resources<replaceable>resource_file</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;server<replaceable>server_entry</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;udpPort<replaceable>port_number</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;session<replaceable>session_program</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtlogin</command><arg choice="opt">-config<replaceable>configuration_file</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-daemon</arg><arg choice="opt">-debug<replaceable>debug_level</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-error<replaceable>error_log_file</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-quiet</arg><arg choice="opt">-nodaemon</arg><arg choice="opt">-resources<replaceable>resource_file</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-server<replaceable>server_entry</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-udpPort<replaceable>port_number</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-session<replaceable>session_program</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -315,12 +315,12 @@ the <literal>Xserver</literal>, <literal>Xsecurity</literal>, <literal>xhost</li
</refsect1>
<refsect1>
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<para>All options, except <literal>&minus;config</literal>, specify values
<para>All options, except <literal>-config</literal>, specify values
that can also be specified in the configuration file as resources. Typically,
customization is done via the configuration file rather than command line
options. The options are most useful for debugging and one-shot tests.</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;config configuration_file</term>
<varlistentry><term>-config configuration_file</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies a resource file that specifies the remaining configuration
@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ parameters. This replaces the <command>dtlogin</command> default Xconfig file. S
section for more information.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;daemon</term>
<varlistentry><term>-daemon</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies True as the value for the <literal>daemonMode</literal>
@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ disassociate the controlling terminal and put itself in the background when
it first starts up (just like the host of other daemons).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;debug debug_level</term>
<varlistentry><term>-debug debug_level</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies the numeric value for the <literal>debugLevel</literal> resource.
@ -345,14 +345,14 @@ A non-zero value causes <command>dtlogin</command> to print debugging statements
it also disables the <literal>daemonMode</literal> resource, forcing <command>dtlogin</command> to run synchronously.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;error error_log_file</term>
<varlistentry><term>-error error_log_file</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies the value for the <literal>errorLogFile</literal> resource.
See the Xerrors section for more information.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;nodaemon</term>
<varlistentry><term>-nodaemon</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies False as the value for the <literal>daemonMode</literal>
@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ resource.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;quiet</term>
<varlistentry><term>-quiet</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies True as the value for the <literal>quiet</literal>
@ -368,21 +368,21 @@ resource. This prevents dtlogin from writing status messages to tty1.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;resources resource_file</term>
<varlistentry><term>-resources resource_file</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies the value for the <literal>resources</literal> resource.
See the Xresources section for more information.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;server server_entry</term>
<varlistentry><term>-server server_entry</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies the value for the <literal>servers</literal> resource. See
the Xservers section for more information.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;udpPort port_number</term>
<varlistentry><term>-udpPort port_number</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies the value for the <literal>requestPort</literal> resource.
@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ XDMCP uses the registered well-known udp port 177, this resource should probably
not be changed except for debugging.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;session session_program</term>
<varlistentry><term>-session session_program</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Specifies the value for the <literal>session</literal> resource. See
@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ using XDMCP.</para>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>The display name must be something that can be passed in the
<literal>&minus;display</literal> option to any X program. This string is used in the
<literal>-display</literal> option to any X program. This string is used in the
display-specific resources to specify the particular display, so be careful
to match the names (e.g., use <literal>":0 local /usr/bin/X11/X :0"</literal>
instead of <literal>"localhost:0 local /usr/bin/X11/X :0"</literal> if your
@ -978,7 +978,7 @@ dynamically, so authName is ignored in this case. (See authorize.)</para>
</refsect2>
<refsect2>
<title>authFile</title>
<para>This file is used to communicate the authorization data from <command>dtlogin</command> to the server, using the &minus;auth server command line
<para>This file is used to communicate the authorization data from <command>dtlogin</command> to the server, using the -auth server command line
option. It should be kept in a write- protected directory to prevent its erasure,
which would disable the authorization mechanism in the server. If NULL, <command>dtlogin</command>
will generate a file name.</para>

26
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/lp.sgm
View file

@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ specified, the command line option takes precedence.
<Title>Command Line Options</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;b banner_title</Term>
<Term>-b banner_title</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Set the string used in printing the banner on the title page.
If the <Literal>-r</Literal> option is also specified, then print this same string
@ -184,14 +184,14 @@ on the page headers.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;d lpdest</Term>
<Term>-d lpdest</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Set the printer destination for the file.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;m print_command</Term>
<Term>-m print_command</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Use this value as the path name of the
<Literal>lp</Literal> print command.
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ The default is
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;n copy_count</Term>
<Term>-n copy_count</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Print this many copies.
Default is 1.
@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Default is 1.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;o other_options</Term>
<Term>-o other_options</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Pass these options directly through to the
<Literal>print_command</Literal>, without any interpretation.
@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ intended for users with advanced printing knowledge.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;u user_filename</Term>
<Term>-u user_filename</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Use this value as the name of file as it should appear in the
<Symbol Role="Message">Print</Symbol> dialog or print output.
@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ setting under the <Symbol>ENVIRONMENT</Symbol> heading in this man page.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;a</Term>
<Term>-a</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Causes the file to be formatted with the <Literal>man</Literal>
command.
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ as <Literal>-r</Literal>) are ignored.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;e</Term>
<Term>-e</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Remove the file after printing it.
This functionality is intended for temporary files generated by
@ -251,14 +251,14 @@ Equivalent to the <Emphasis>DTPRINTFILEREMOVE</Emphasis>.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;h</Term>
<Term>-h</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Print out a help message.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;r</Term>
<Term>-r</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Format the file before printing it, by running it through
the <Literal>pr -f</Literal> command.
@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ the <Literal>pr -f</Literal> command.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;s</Term>
<Term>-s</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Print the file silently, without posting the
<Symbol Role="Message">Print</Symbol> dialog.
@ -276,14 +276,14 @@ setting under the <Symbol>ENVIRONMENT</Symbol> heading in this man page.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;v</Term>
<Term>-v</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Print out verbose messages during the print process.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;w</Term>
<Term>-w</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Causes output to the printer to be sent raw, with no
interpretation of tabs, backspaces, formfeeds, and

10
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/mail.sgm
View file

@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
mailer</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtmail</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;h</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;c</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;f<replaceable>mailfile</replaceable></arg><group><arg>&minus;a <replaceable>file1</replaceable></arg><arg>...<replaceable>fileN</replaceable></arg></group>
<command>dtmail</command><arg choice="opt">-h</arg><arg choice="opt">-c</arg><arg choice="opt">-f<replaceable>mailfile</replaceable></arg><group><arg>-a <replaceable>file1</replaceable></arg><arg>...<replaceable>fileN</replaceable></arg></group>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ use the Tooltalk API to compose and send messages.</para>
<refsect1>
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;a file1 ... fileN</term>
<varlistentry><term>-a file1 ... fileN</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Bring up a Compose window with &thinsp;file1&thinsp; through &thinsp;fileN&thinsp;
as attachments.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;c</term>
<varlistentry><term>-c</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Bring up an empty Compose window</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;f filename</term>
<varlistentry><term>-f filename</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>This specifies the mail file to be loaded in at start up time. Ordinarily,
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ user's inbox. Use of this option overrides the use of the MAIL variable.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>&minus;h</term>
<varlistentry><term>-h</term>
<listitem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<para>Display help for command line options</para>

8
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/mailpr.sgm
View file

@ -24,8 +24,8 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtmailpr</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;f<Replaceable>filename</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;p</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-f<Replaceable>filename</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-p</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ and attachments removed. If no filename argument is provided
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;p</Term>
<Term>-p</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Insert page breaks between each mail message so that they print one
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ per page.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;f filename</Term>
<Term>-f filename</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Read from the specified file instead of standard in.

72
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/pad.sgm
View file

@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
</refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtpad</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;<replaceable>options</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtpad</command><arg choice="opt">-<replaceable>options</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv><refsect1>
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ standard dialogs are presented for accessing files and printing text.</para>
<para>Wrap-to-fit and overstrike modes.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Optional status line &minus; allowing cursor positioning by line number.
<para>Optional status line - allowing cursor positioning by line number.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ the X Window System convention of full-word options.
<refsect2>
<title>Basic Command Line Options</title>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;saveOnClose</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-saveOnClose</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Automatically and silently saves the current text when there are unsaved
changes and the Text Editor is closed. The default action for this situation
@ -90,20 +90,20 @@ Save dialog is always posted when a new file is specified and there are unsaved
changes.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;missingFileWarning</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-missingFileWarning</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Posts a Warning dialog whenever a file name is specified and the file
does not exist or cannot be accessed.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;noReadOnlyWarning</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-noReadOnlyWarning</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Disables the Warning dialog posted whenever a file is specified for
which the user does not have write permission. The default posts a Warning
dialog whenever this situation occurs.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;noNameChange</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-noNameChange</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates that the default file name associated with the current text
is not to change when the text is saved under a name different than what it
@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ file name is automatically changed to correspond to the last name under which
the current text was saved.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;viewOnly</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-viewOnly</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Disallows editing of text in the edit window, essentially turning the
Text Editor into a text viewer. The default allows text editing in the edit
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ have write permission.</para>
</variablelist>
<![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;statusLine</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-statusLine</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Displays a status line at the bottom of the edit window. The status
line shows the line number of the line where the text cursor is currently
@ -133,14 +133,14 @@ the line number window in the status line, typing the desired number and pressin
the Return key. Normally, a status line is not displayed.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;wrapToFit</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-wrapToFit</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Initially turns on wrap-to-fit mode. Wrap-to-fit mode can be toggled
on or off via the <symbol role="Message">Edit</symbol> menu Wrap-to-fit button
and normally is initially turned off.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;workspaceList</literal> <emphasis>workspace_list</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-workspaceList</literal> <emphasis>workspace_list</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Displays the edit window for the current invocation of the Text Editor
in the specified workspace or workspaces. The default displays the edit window
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ If more than one workspace is specified, the list must be enclosed in quotes.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;session</literal> <emphasis>session_file</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-session</literal> <emphasis>session_file</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Restores the Text Editor to all text editing windows and settings that
were in effect at a previous &str-XZ; shutdown. All other command-line options
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ state at shutdown.</para>
<refsect2>
<title>Client and Server Control Options</title>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;standAlone</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-standAlone</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Forces the current invocation of the Text Editor to do its own text
processing in its own window, independent of the Text Editor server. This
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ a different locale or different color resources. The Text Editor still supports
file drag and drop in this mode.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;noBlocking</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-noBlocking</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Terminates the Text Editor requestor process as soon as the Text Editor
server determines that it can handle the requestor's edit request. If this
@ -185,22 +185,22 @@ option is not specified, the requestor blocks, terminating only when it receives
notification from the server that its edit window has been closed.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;server</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-server</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Forces a Text Editor server to be started up (if one is not already
running) to process all subsequent edit requests for the display. These edit
requests are normally generated by subsequent invocations of the Text Editor
without the <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal> command-line option and cause
without the <literal>-standAlone</literal> command-line option and cause
the server to create a separate edit window to handle each request. Users
normally do not need to use this option since the initial edit request for
the display causes the &str-XZ; to start a Text Editor server automatically.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;exitOnLastClose</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-exitOnLastClose</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies that the Text Editor server process is to terminate when the
last edit window for the display is closed. It should only be used with the <literal>&minus;server</literal> option since it only applies to the server process.
last edit window for the display is closed. It should only be used with the <literal>-server</literal> option since it only applies to the server process.
If this option is not specified, the Text Editor server remains active indefinitely,
even when all active edit windows have been closed.</para>
</listitem>
@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ specific to the Text Editor are passed on the Text Editor server. None of
the standard widget resources, except for geometry, are passed on from the
requestor Text Editor to the Text Editor server. These resources are loaded
according to the environment on the server's host at the time the server is
started up. If more control is required, the <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal>
started up. If more control is required, the <literal>-standAlone</literal>
command-line option is used to create a separate, stand alone <command>dtpad</command> process where any and all of the standard resources, such as <literal>fontList</literal> or <literal>colors</literal>, can be loaded according to
the environment on the requestor's host.</para>]]>
<informaltable remap="center" orient="port">
@ -323,35 +323,35 @@ the environment on the requestor's host.</para>]]>
<para>Indicates whether the Text Editor is to save automatically the current
text when there are unsaved changes and the Text Editor is closed. Setting
this resource to True automatically saves unsaved changes when the Text Editor
is closed. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;saveOnClose</literal> command-line option.</para>
is closed. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-saveOnClose</literal> command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>missingFileWarning</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates whether a warning dialog is to be posted when a file is specified
that does not exist or cannot be accessed. Setting this resource to True displays
the warning. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;missingFileWarning</literal> command-line option.</para>
the warning. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-missingFileWarning</literal> command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>readOnlyWarning</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates whether a warning dialog is to be posted when a file for which
the user does not have write permission is read. Setting this resource to
False suppresses the warning. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;noReadOnlyWarning</literal> command-line option.</para>
False suppresses the warning. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-noReadOnlyWarning</literal> command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>nameChange</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates whether the current file name is to be changed when the current
text is saved under a new name. Setting this resource to False does not allow
the name to be reset. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;noNameChange</literal> command-line option.</para>
the name to be reset. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-noNameChange</literal> command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>viewOnly</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates whether text only be viewed or whether it can be edited in
the edit window. Setting this resource to True disables text editing. This
is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;viewOnly</literal> command-line
is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-viewOnly</literal> command-line
option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry><![ %CDE.C.XO; [</VariableList>]]><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<varlistentry>
@ -359,26 +359,26 @@ option.</para>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates whether the Text Editor is to display the status line at the
bottom of the edit window. Setting this resource to True displays the status
line. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;statusLine</literal>
line. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-statusLine</literal>
command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>wrapToFit</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates whether the Text Editor is to enable wrap-to-fit mode when
the editor is started. Setting this resource to True enables wrap-to-fit mode.
This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;wrapToFit</literal> command-line
This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-wrapToFit</literal> command-line
option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>workspaceList</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Indicates which workspace or workspaces the Text Editor is to be displayed
in. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;workspaceList</literal>
in. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-workspaceList</literal>
command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>session</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the saved session file to use in restoring a previously saved
Text Editor session. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;session</literal> command-line argument.</para>
Text Editor session. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-session</literal> command-line argument.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry></variablelist>
<informaltable remap="center" orient="port">
@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Resources</literal></entry>
<para>Specifies whether the Text Editor is to run as a separate, independent
Text Editor process without using the Text Editor server. Setting this resource
to True invokes a separate, independent process. This is equivalent to specifying
the <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal> command-line option.</para>
the <literal>-standAlone</literal> command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>blocking</literal></term>
@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ the <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal> command-line option.</para>
receiving notification from the Text Editor server that the user exited or
closed its edit window. Setting this resource to False causes the client process
to exit immediately when the server determines that it can handle its edit
request. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;noBlocking</literal>
request. This is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-noBlocking</literal>
command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ command-line option.</para>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies that the Text Editor is to be started in server mode to handle
all processing for all subsequent edit requests for the display. Setting this
resource to True is equivalent to specifying the <literal>&minus;server</literal>
resource to True is equivalent to specifying the <literal>-server</literal>
command-line option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ command-line option.</para>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies that the Text Editor server is to terminate when the last
edit window for the display is closed. Setting this resource to True is equivalent
to specifying the <literal>&minus;exitOnLastClose</literal> command-line option.
to specifying the <literal>-exitOnLastClose</literal> command-line option.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -711,10 +711,10 @@ Save</symbol> request or a user action.</para>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Requestor Mode</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>When the Text Editor is started without any overriding command-line
options (that is, <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal> or <literal>&minus;server</literal>), it always attempts to run in this mode. In this mode it simply
options (that is, <literal>-standAlone</literal> or <literal>-server</literal>), it always attempts to run in this mode. In this mode it simply
sends an edit request to a separate Text Editor server process and then blocks
(does nothing) until it receives a notice from the server when its edit request
is done, at which time it exits. If <literal>&minus;noBlocking</literal> is
is done, at which time it exits. If <literal>-noBlocking</literal> is
specified, it exits immediately after the server accepts its edit request
rather than waiting until the edit request is done.</para>
</listitem>
@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ rather than waiting until the edit request is done.</para>
<listitem>
<para>If the Text Editor server cannot process the edit request from the Text
Editor instance (for example, the server process doesn't exist or can't be
started, or it can't access the requestor's file), or if <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal> is specified on the command line, the Text Editor instance operates
started, or it can't access the requestor's file), or if <literal>-standAlone</literal> is specified on the command line, the Text Editor instance operates
in <literal>standAlone</literal> mode. In this mode the Text Editor creates
its own edit window and handles all processing for this window on its own.
In addition, it does not handle any edit requests from outside sources and
@ -732,11 +732,11 @@ it exits when its edit window is closed.</para>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>Server Mode</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>When <literal>&minus;server</literal> is specified on the command line,
<para>When <literal>-server</literal> is specified on the command line,
the Text Editor instance operates as a server for all Text Editor edit requests
for the same display. That is, it creates a separate edit window and does
the actual editing for all Text Editor instances running to the same display
that do not have <literal>&minus;standAlone</literal> specified on their command
that do not have <literal>-standAlone</literal> specified on their command
line. Only one Text Editor server for a display can exist, and in the &str-XZ;,
this instance is normally started automatically if it's not running at the
time an edit request is made.</para>

16
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/pdm.sgm
View file

@ -19,10 +19,10 @@ printer-specific GUIs
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtpdm</command>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;vdisplay <replaceable>vdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;window <replaceable>vwid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;pdisplay <replaceable>pdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;pcontext <replaceable>pcid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-vdisplay <replaceable>vdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-window <replaceable>vwid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-pdisplay <replaceable>pdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-pcontext <replaceable>pcid</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -184,26 +184,26 @@ spooler.
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;vdisplay</literal> <emphasis>vdpy</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-vdisplay</literal> <emphasis>vdpy</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the display connection to the Video X-Server.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;window</literal> <emphasis>vwid</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-window</literal> <emphasis>vwid</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the window id on the Video X-Server to which the PDM&rsquo;s
dialogs should be posted as transient windows.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;pdisplay</literal> <emphasis>pdpy</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-pdisplay</literal> <emphasis>pdpy</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the display connection to the Print X-Server.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;pcontext</literal> <emphasis>pcid</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-pcontext</literal> <emphasis>pcid</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the print context id on the Print X-Server. The PDM uses
this id to gain access to the print context being used by the requesting

44
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/pdmd.sgm
View file

@ -17,12 +17,12 @@ Print Dialog Manager daemon
</refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtpdmd</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;d <replaceable>display</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;a <replaceable>selection</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;p <replaceable>pdm</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;P <replaceable>pdm</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;s</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;l <replaceable>logfile</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtpdmd</command><arg choice="opt">-d <replaceable>display</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-a <replaceable>selection</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-p <replaceable>pdm</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-P <replaceable>pdm</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-s</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-l <replaceable>logfile</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -46,17 +46,17 @@ Communication from the PDM is done via standardized exit codes.</para>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dt-pdm-command</command>
<arg choice="opt"><replaceable>dt-pdm-options</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;vdisplay <replaceable>vdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;window <replaceable>vwid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;pdisplay <replaceable>pdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;pcontext <replaceable>pcid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-vdisplay <replaceable>vdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-window <replaceable>vwid</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-pdisplay <replaceable>pdpy</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-pcontext <replaceable>pcid</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>dt-pdm-command</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the path for the PDM executable.
It is derived by the <command>dtpdmd</command> from either the
<literal>&minus;p</literal> or <literal>&minus;P</literal> option.
<literal>-p</literal> or <literal>-P</literal> option.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -64,30 +64,30 @@ It is derived by the <command>dtpdmd</command> from either the
<listitem>
<para>Specifies options that may have accompanied the <emphasis>dt-pdm-command</emphasis>,
whether specified on the <command>dtpdmd</command> command line by the
<literal>&minus;p</literal> or <literal>&minus;P</literal> option or from other sources.
<literal>-p</literal> or <literal>-P</literal> option or from other sources.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;vdisplay</literal> <emphasis>vdpy</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-vdisplay</literal> <emphasis>vdpy</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the display connection to the Video X-Server.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;window</literal> <emphasis>vwid</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-window</literal> <emphasis>vwid</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the window id on the Video X-Server to which the PDM&rsquo;s
dialogs should be posted as transient windows.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;pdisplay</literal> <emphasis>pdpy</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-pdisplay</literal> <emphasis>pdpy</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the display connection to the Print X-Server.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;pcontext</literal> <emphasis>pcid</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-pcontext</literal> <emphasis>pcid</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the print context id on the Print X-Server. The PDM uses
this id to gain access to the print context being used by the requesting
@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ often found in other libraries (for example, untrapped XIO errors from libX).
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;d</literal> <emphasis>display</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-d</literal> <emphasis>display</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the display connection to an X-Server upon which an X-selection
will be created and managed for requests. If specified, it overrides the
@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ environment variable <systemitem class="environvar">XPDMDISPLAY</systemitem>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;a</literal> <emphasis>selection</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-a</literal> <emphasis>selection</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies an alternative X-selection name for <command>dtpdmd</command>
to create and manage. If specified, it overrides the environment variable
@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ to create and manage. If specified, it overrides the environment variable
the selection name is <literal>PDM_MANAGER</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;p</literal> <emphasis>pdm</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-p</literal> <emphasis>pdm</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a PDM execution string to use if no other PDM execution string
can be derived, usually from the Server Attribute
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ All execution strings are applied against the current search path.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;P</literal> <emphasis>pdm</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-P</literal> <emphasis>pdm</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies an alternative PDM execution string that overrides all other
sources of such execution strings. All execution strings are applied
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ against the current search path.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;s</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-s</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtpdmd</command> to turn on the security exchange
portion of the PDM Selection Protocol. By default, <command>dtpdmd</command>
@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ does not exchange security information with an application over the wire,
so the appearance of <literal>auto hosting</literal> cannot be done.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l</literal> <emphasis>logfile</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l</literal> <emphasis>logfile</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies a file for <command>dtpdmd</command> to use for logging errors
and warnings. Entries are time-stamped and may be generated by <command>dtpdmd</command> or any child PDM via stderr. The previous contents of the

20
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/screen.sgm
View file

@ -13,10 +13,10 @@
Common Desktop Environment animated screen savers</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtscreen</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;display <replaceable>dsp</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;delay <replaceable>usecs</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;batchcount <replaceable>num</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt">&minus;saturation <replaceable>value</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt">&minus;nice <replaceable>nicelevel</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;mode <replaceable>mode</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtscreen</command><arg choice="opt">-display <replaceable>dsp</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-delay <replaceable>usecs</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-batchcount <replaceable>num</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt">-saturation <replaceable>value</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt">-nice <replaceable>nicelevel</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-mode <replaceable>mode</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -106,17 +106,17 @@ are:</para>
</refsect1>
<refsect1>
<title>OPTIONS</title>
<para><literal>&minus;display</literal> <emphasis>dsp</emphasis></para>
<para><literal>-display</literal> <emphasis>dsp</emphasis></para>
<!--Start of RS / RE range-->
<para>The display on which animations will be drawn.</para>
<!--End of RS / RE range-->
<para><literal>&minus;delay</literal> <emphasis>usecs</emphasis></para>
<para><literal>-delay</literal> <emphasis>usecs</emphasis></para>
<!--Start of RS / RE range-->
<para>The delay option sets the speed at which a mode will operate. It simply
sets the number of microseconds to delay between batches of "hopalong pixels",
"qix lines", "life generations", "image blits", and "swarm motions".</para>
<!--End of RS / RE range-->
<para><literal>&minus;batchcount</literal> <emphasis>num</emphasis></para>
<para><literal>-batchcount</literal> <emphasis>num</emphasis></para>
<!--Start of RS / RE range-->
<para>The batchcount option sets the number of things to do per batch to num.
In qix mode this refers to the number of lines rendered in the same color.
@ -125,17 +125,17 @@ In image mode this refers to the number of X logos on the screen at once.
in swarm mode this refers to the number of bees. In life mode it means nothing.
</para>
<!--End of RS / RE range-->
<para><literal>&minus;saturation</literal> <emphasis>value</emphasis></para>
<para><literal>-saturation</literal> <emphasis>value</emphasis></para>
<!--Start of RS / RE range-->
<para>The saturation option sets the saturation of the color ramp used to
value. 0 is grayscale, 1 is very rich color and 0.4 is a nice pastel.</para>
<!--End of RS / RE range-->
<para><literal>&minus;nice</literal> <emphasis>nicelevel</emphasis></para>
<para><literal>-nice</literal> <emphasis>nicelevel</emphasis></para>
<!--Start of RS / RE range-->
<para>The nice option sets the system nicelevel of the dtscreen process to
nicelevel.</para>
<!--End of RS / RE range-->
<para><literal>&minus;mode</literal> <emphasis>mode</emphasis></para>
<para><literal>-mode</literal> <emphasis>mode</emphasis></para>
<!--Start of RS / RE range-->
<para>The mode option specifies which animation should be displayed. Values
are:</para>

10
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/searchpa.sgm
View file

@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ For example:
<Emphasis>DTSPUSERAPPHOSTS</Emphasis>. <SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">XMICONSEARCHPATH</SystemItem> is supported by
<Emphasis>DTSPSYSICON</Emphasis> and
<Emphasis>DTSPUSERICON</Emphasis>.</Para>
<Para>The input search path environment variables fall into two categories &minus;
<Para>The input search path environment variables fall into two categories -
those that support the host:/path syntax and those that do not.
If the name of
the input environment variable contains the string
@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ default <Filename>/etc/dt</Filename> configuration location is up to the user of
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;u user</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-u user</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Causes
<Command>dtsearchpath</Command> to return the search paths for the specified user.
@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ a particular user.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;v</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-v</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The verbose option causes
<Command>dtsearchpath</Command> to print to standard output the values of the search environment
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ formatted for easier human reading. By default, the command runs silently.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;csh</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-csh</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Causes <Command>dtsearchpath</Command> to return values suitable for
evaluation by a C Shell script. By default, the command returns values suitable for
@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ evaluation by a Bourne Shell script.
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;ksh</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-ksh</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Causes <Command>dtsearchpath</Command> to return values suitable fore
evaluation by a Korn Shell script. By default, the command returns values suitable for

6
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/session.sgm
View file

@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
CDE Session Manager</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtsession</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;norestore</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;session <replaceable>session_name</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtsession</command><arg choice="opt">-norestore</arg><arg choice="opt">-session <replaceable>session_name</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
<refsect1>
@ -925,13 +925,13 @@ set the <literal>RestartStyleHint</literal> property to <literal>RestartNever</l
the DT Login Manager (<command>dtlogin</command>). If desired, <command>dtsession</command> may also be started on an existing X server. Note that <command>dtsession</command> automatically starts a window manager.</para>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;norestore</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-norestore</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsession</command> not to restore a previous session
nor save the session upon logout.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;session</literal> <symbol role="variable">session_name</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-session</literal> <symbol role="variable">session_name</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsession</command> to start the specified session.
Valid session names are:</para>

22
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/srcreate.sgm
View file

@ -13,8 +13,8 @@
and initialize a DtSearch database</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtsrcreate</command><arg choice="opt">&minus;q</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;o</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;fd</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;fa</arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;a<replaceable>abstr</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt">&minus;d<replaceable>dir</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;wn<replaceable>min</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;wx <replaceable>max</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">&minus;l<replaceable>lang</replaceable></arg>
<command>dtsrcreate</command><arg choice="opt">-q</arg><arg choice="opt">-o</arg><arg choice="opt">-fd</arg><arg choice="opt">-fa</arg><arg choice="opt">-a<replaceable>abstr</replaceable></arg><arg
choice="opt">-d<replaceable>dir</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-wn<replaceable>min</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-wx <replaceable>max</replaceable></arg><arg choice="opt">-l<replaceable>lang</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>dbname</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
@ -86,35 +86,35 @@ search words are highlighted as desired.</para>
option name without white space.</para>
</note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;q</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-q</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Suppresses printing of configuration record report.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;o</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-o</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Suppresses overwrite prompt; preauthorizes erasure and reinitialization
of preexisting database.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;d</literal><symbol role="Variable">dir</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-d</literal><symbol role="Variable">dir</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies where to find the model <filename>dtsearch.dbe</filename>
file, rather than in the current working directory or target directory.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;fd</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-fd</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Configure a <Symbol>DtSearch</Symbol> type database. This is the default.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;fa</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-fa</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Configure an <literal>AusText</literal> type database.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;a</literal><symbol role="Variable">abstr</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-a</literal><symbol role="Variable">abstr</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Set the maximum abstract size to <symbol role="Variable">abstr</symbol>
bytes. This is the maximum permitted length in characters for an abstract
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ type. (See &cdeman.dtsrfzkfiles; and &cdeman.DtSearch;
for more information about abstract fields.)</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;wn</literal><symbol role="Variable">min</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-wn</literal><symbol role="Variable">min</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Change minimum word size to <symbol role="Variable">min</symbol> characters.
This is the minimum word size in characters to be indexed in the database.
@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ languages and may be ignored by multibyte language processors. (See
&cdeman.DtSearch; for more information about DtSearch word sizes).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;wx</literal><symbol role="Variable">max</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-wx</literal><symbol role="Variable">max</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Change maximum word size to <symbol role="Variable">max</symbol> characters.
This is the maximum word size in characters. Smaller is better since extraordinarily
@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ language processors. (See &cdeman.DtSearch; for more information
about DtSearch word sizes).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l</literal><symbol role="Variable">lang</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l</literal><symbol role="Variable">lang</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Change the language number to <symbol role="Variable">lang</symbol>.
The default is 0.</para>

18
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/srhan.sgm
View file

@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ cmd</manvolnum>
a DtSearch fzk file</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis> <command>dtsrhan</command> <arg
choice="opt">&minus;m</arg> <arg choice="opt">&minus;oo</arg> <arg
choice="opt">&minus;oa</arg> <arg
choice="opt">&minus;w<replaceable>screensz</replaceable></arg> <arg
choice="opt">-m</arg> <arg choice="opt">-oo</arg> <arg
choice="opt">-oa</arg> <arg
choice="opt">-w<replaceable>screensz</replaceable></arg> <arg
choice="plain"><replaceable>hanfile</replaceable></arg> <arg
choice="plain"><replaceable>textfile</replaceable></arg> <arg
choice="opt"><replaceable>fzkfile</replaceable></arg> </cmdsynopsis>
@ -46,31 +46,31 @@ desirable way.
option takes a value, the value must be directly appended to the option
name without white space.</para> </note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;m</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-m</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Switches off all messages except error messages.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;oo</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-oo</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Overwrite preexisting fzk file. If this option and the
<literal>&minus;oa</literal> option are omitted and the output fzk file
<literal>-oa</literal> option are omitted and the output fzk file
already exists, <command>dtsrhan</command> prompts for which option to
use.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;oa</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-oa</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Append new output to preexisting fzk file. If this option and the
<literal>&minus;oo</literal> option are omitted and the output fzk file
<literal>-oo</literal> option are omitted and the output fzk file
already exists, <command>dtsrhan</command> prompts for which option to
use.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;w</literal><symbol role="Variable">screensz</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-w</literal><symbol role="Variable">screensz</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the
target screen width to <symbol role="Variable">screensz</symbol>

32
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/srindex.sgm
View file

@ -14,15 +14,15 @@
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtsrindex</command>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;d<replaceable>dbname</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;t<replaceable>etxstr</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="plain"><arg choice="plain">&minus;h0</arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;h<replaceable>hashsz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-d<replaceable>dbname</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-t<replaceable>etxstr</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="plain"><arg choice="plain">-h0</arg>
<arg choice="plain">-h<replaceable>hashsz</replaceable></arg>
</group></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;r<replaceable>recdots</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;b<replaceable>batchsz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;c<replaceable>cachesz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;i<replaceable>inbufsz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-r<replaceable>recdots</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-b<replaceable>batchsz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-c<replaceable>cachesz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-i<replaceable>inbufsz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ of the database.
the option name without white space.</para>
</note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;d</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dbname</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-d</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dbname</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the 1 to 8 ASCII character name of the database to be
updated.
@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ files are automatically appended.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">etxstr</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">etxstr</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the end of document text delimiter string. The default
document separator in an fzk file is an ASCII form feed character
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ delimiter.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h0</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h0</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrindex</command> to not check for duplicate
record ids. This option should not be specified unless it
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ is certain that there are no duplicate ids in the fzk file.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">hashsz</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">hashsz</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the duplicate record id hash table size to <Symbol Role="Variable">hashsz</Symbol>. The default is 3000.
<command>dtsrindex</command> will execute more efficiently if the
@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ file.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;r</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">recdots</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-r</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">recdots</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrindex</command> to print a progress character to
stdout for every <Symbol Role="Variable">recdots</Symbol> documents
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ processed during the first pass. The default is 20.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;b</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">batchsz</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-b</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">batchsz</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the batch size to <Symbol Role="Variable">batchsz</Symbol>. The
default is 10000. The batch size is the maximum number of records
@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ of memory.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;c</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">cachesz</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-c</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">cachesz</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the number of 1024 byte cache pages used by the DtSearch Database
Management System to <Symbol Role="Variable">cachesz</Symbol>. The
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ or equal to 16, in even powers of 2. The default is usually sufficient.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;i</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">inbufsz</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-i</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">inbufsz</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the size of the input line buffer to <Symbol Role="Variable">inbufsz</Symbol>. The default is 1024 bytes. This
buffer is used only for reading the four ASCII header lines for each

46
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/srkdump.sgm
View file

@ -16,14 +16,14 @@ Produce reports about DtSearch database keys
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtsrkdump</command>
<group choice="plain">
<arg choice="plain">&minus;o</arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;w</arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;ow</arg>
<arg choice="plain">-o</arg>
<arg choice="plain">-w</arg>
<arg choice="plain">-ow</arg>
</group>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;v</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-v</arg>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="plain">
<arg choice="plain">&minus;t<replaceable>threshold</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;p<replaceable>percent</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-t<replaceable>threshold</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-p<replaceable>percent</replaceable></arg>
</group></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>dbname</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Produce reports about DtSearch database keys
<para><command>dtsrkdump</command> is a convenience utility that traverses the
word/stem, document, or both b-trees for the specified DtSearch database
and prints a summary report about the keys to stdout. The
<literal>&minus;v</literal> option additionally prints a detailed key by
<literal>-v</literal> option additionally prints a detailed key by
key report. <command>dtsrkdump</command> can be used to confirm
integrity of the b-trees, and to count and report currently available
documents and keytypes.
@ -47,32 +47,32 @@ documents and keytypes.
the option name without white space.</para>
</note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;o</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-o</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrkdump</command> to produce a report for unique
document keys. You must specify this argument or the <literal>&minus;w</literal>
or <literal>&minus;ow</literal> argument.
document keys. You must specify this argument or the <literal>-w</literal>
or <literal>-ow</literal> argument.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;w</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-w</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrkdump</command> to produce a report for word and
stem keys. You must specify this argument or the
<literal>&minus;o</literal> or <literal>&minus;ow</literal> argument.
<literal>-o</literal> or <literal>-ow</literal> argument.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;ow</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-ow</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrkdump</command> to produce reports for both
unique document keys and word and stem keys. You must specify this
argument or the <literal>&minus;o</literal> or
<literal>&minus;w</literal> argument.
argument or the <literal>-o</literal> or
<literal>-w</literal> argument.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;v</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-v</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies verbose mode, which generates a report item for every key in
the database. Use this option with caution when working with very large
@ -80,27 +80,27 @@ databases.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">threshold</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">threshold</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the frequency of occurrence threshold for reporting words to
<Symbol Role="Variable">threshold</Symbol>. <command>dtsrkdump</command>
will output only those words that occure in at least
<Symbol Role="Variable">threshold</Symbol> records. Setting the threshold to 1
will output all words. If neither the <literal>&minus;t</literal> nor
<literal>&minus;p</literal> option is specified, the default threshold
is <literal>&minus;t100</literal>.
will output all words. If neither the <literal>-t</literal> nor
<literal>-p</literal> option is specified, the default threshold
is <literal>-t100</literal>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">percent</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">percent</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the frequency threshold for reporting words to a percentage of all
records. <Symbol Role="Variable">percent</Symbol> is a floating-point
number between 0 and 100, and can include the decimal point.
<command>dtsrkdump</command> will output only those words that occur
in at least <Symbol Role="Variable">percent</Symbol> of all records. If
neither the <literal>&minus;t</literal> nor <literal>&minus;p</literal>
option is specified, the default threshold is <literal>&minus;t100</literal>.
neither the <literal>-t</literal> nor <literal>-p</literal>
option is specified, the default threshold is <literal>-t100</literal>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>

28
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/srload.sgm
View file

@ -14,14 +14,14 @@ document objects in a database</refpurpose></refnamediv>
<refsynopsisdiv>
<cmdsynopsis>
<command>dtsrload</command>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;d<replaceable>dbname</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;c</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;t<replaceable>etxstr</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="plain"><arg choice="plain">&minus;h0</arg>
<arg choice="plain">&minus;h<replaceable>hashsz</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain">-d<replaceable>dbname</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-c</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-t<replaceable>etxstr</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt"><group choice="plain"><arg choice="plain">-h0</arg>
<arg choice="plain">-h<replaceable>hashsz</replaceable></arg>
</group></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;e<replaceable>hufname</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;p<replaceable>dotcnt</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-e<replaceable>hufname</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-p<replaceable>dotcnt</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>file</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv>
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ be allowed to perform online searches of the database.
the option name without white space.</para>
</note>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;d</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dbname</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-d</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dbname</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the 1 to 8 ASCII character name of the database to be
updated.
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ files are automatically appended.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;c</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-c</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrload</command> to initialize the database total
document count by counting existing records before loading the current
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ batch. This option is usually not required.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">etxstr</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-t</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">etxstr</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the end of document text delimiter string. The default
document separator in an fzk file is an ASCII form feed character
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ delimiter.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h0</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h0</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrload</command> to not check for duplicate
record ids. This option should not be specified unless it
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ is certain that there are no duplicate ids in the fzk file.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;h</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">hashsz</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-h</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">hashsz</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the duplicate record id hash table size to
<Symbol Role="Variable">hashsz</Symbol>. The default is 3000.
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ file.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;e</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">hufname</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-e</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">hufname</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Sets the compression encode file name to
<Symbol Role="Variable">hufname</Symbol>. The default is
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ This option is ignored unless the database type is AusText.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;p</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dotcount</Symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-p</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dotcount</Symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Instructs <command>dtsrload</command> to print a progress character to
stdout for every <Symbol Role="Variable">dotcount</Symbol> documents

218
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/term.sgm
View file

@ -16,45 +16,45 @@ user cmd</manvolnum></refmeta><refnamediv><refname><command>dtterm</command></re
<command>dtterm</command>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;132</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;aw</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;background <replaceable>background_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;bg <replaceable>background_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-background <replaceable>background_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-bg <replaceable>background_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;bs</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;C</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;display <replaceable>display_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;e <replaceable>program_argument ...</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;fb <replaceable>fontset</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;fg <replaceable>foreground_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;fn <replaceable>fontset</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;font <replaceable>fontset</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;foreground <replaceable>foreground_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;geometry <replaceable>geometry_string</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;help</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-C</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-display <replaceable>display_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-e <replaceable>program_argument ...</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-fb <replaceable>fontset</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-fg <replaceable>foreground_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-fn <replaceable>fontset</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-font <replaceable>fontset</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-foreground <replaceable>foreground_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-geometry <replaceable>geometry_string</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-help</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;iconic</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;j</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;kshMode</arg>
<?sml-break><!-- for the sake of tbl after docbook-to-man -->
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;l</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;lf <replaceable>file_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-lf <replaceable>file_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;ls</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;map</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;mb</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;ms <replaceable>pointer_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;name <replaceable>prog_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;nb <replaceable>number</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-ms <replaceable>pointer_color</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-name <replaceable>prog_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-nb <replaceable>number</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;rw</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;S <replaceable>ccn</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;S <replaceable>c.n</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-S <replaceable>ccn</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-S <replaceable>c.n</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;sb</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;sf</arg>
<group><arg>&minus;sl <replaceable>screens</replaceable></arg>
<group><arg>-sl <replaceable>screens</replaceable></arg>
<group><arg>s&thinsp;</arg><arg>&thinsp;l</arg></group></group>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;ti <replaceable>term_id</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;title <replaceable>title_string</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;tm <replaceable>term_modes</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;tn <replaceable>term_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;usage</arg>
<arg choice="opt">-ti <replaceable>term_id</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-title <replaceable>title_string</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-tm <replaceable>term_modes</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-tn <replaceable>term_name</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-usage</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&plusmn;vb</arg>
<arg choice="opt">&minus;xrm <replaceable>resource_string</replaceable></arg>
<arg choice="opt">-xrm <replaceable>resource_string</replaceable></arg>
</cmdsynopsis>
</refsynopsisdiv><refsect1>
<title>DESCRIPTION</title><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<para>The <command>dtterm</command>
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ utility does not support the &str-Zu; because it uses the X Window System
convention of full-word options.</para>]]>
<para>The following options are available:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;132</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-132</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Recognize the <systemitem class="Constant">DECCOLM</systemitem> escape
sequence and resize the window appropriately. Normally, <command>dtterm</command>
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ which switches between 80- and 132-column mode.</para>
sequence. This is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;aw</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-aw</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Allow auto-wraparound. This option allows the cursor to automatically
wrap to the beginning of the next line when it is at the right-most position
@ -92,11 +92,11 @@ of a line and text is output. This is the default behavior.</para>
<para>Do not allow auto-wraparound.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;background</literal> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-background</literal> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the terminal window background and the default background for
the scroll bar and the X11 pointer cursor. This option defaults to either
the primary colorset background (default) or select pixel (see <literal>&minus;bs</literal> ). <![ %CDE.C.HP; [(When not running under HPVUE,
the primary colorset background (default) or select pixel (see <literal>-bs</literal> ). <![ %CDE.C.HP; [(When not running under HPVUE,
it defaults to
<Literal>*background/*Background</Literal> with an ultimate fallback color of black.)
]]>The <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol> argument describes
@ -104,14 +104,14 @@ the background color.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;bg</literal> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-bg</literal> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol> argument describes the background color.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;bs</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-bs</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Use the Motif select color instead of the background color for the terminal
window's background color.</para>
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ the terminal window's background color. This is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;C</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-C</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify that output directed to <Filename>/dev/console</Filename> be directed
instead to the terminal window. It is provided as a way to prevent output,
@ -135,14 +135,14 @@ for, <Filename>/dev/console</Filename> is required in order to redirect console
output.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;display</literal> <symbol role="variable">display_name</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-display</literal> <symbol role="variable">display_name</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the X11 display server. This defaults to the <systemitem class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</systemitem> environment variable. The <symbol role="variable">display_name</symbol>
argument specifies the X11 display to which <command>dtterm</command> connects.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;e</literal> <symbol role="variable">program_argument
<varlistentry><term><literal>-e</literal> <symbol role="variable">program_argument
...</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify an executable program and any command-line arguments <command>dtterm</command> invokes as a subprocess when <command>dtterm</command> is
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ started. It must be the last option on the command line. The <symbol role="varia
be invoked by <command>dtterm</command>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;fb</literal> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-fb</literal> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify an <structname role="typedef">XFontSet</structname> used by <command>dtterm</command> when displaying bold terminal text. The <structname role="typedef">XFontSet</structname> should be specified as a Motif <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [&cdeman.XmFontList;. ]]><![ %CDE.C.XO; [ <structname role="typedef">XmFontList</structname>. ]]>The terminal emulator supports only character
or mono-spaced fonts. When using proportional fonts, the behavior is undefined.
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ emulator generates bold text by overstriking (with a one pixel offset) the <lite
bold terminal <structname role="typedef">XFontSet</structname> used by <command>dtterm</command>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;fg</literal> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-fg</literal> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the foreground color of the terminal window as well as the default
foreground color used by <command>dtterm</command> for the scroll bar and
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ it defaults to
the foreground color.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;fn</literal> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-fn</literal> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify an <structname role="typedef">XFontSet</structname> used by <command>dtterm</command> when displaying terminal text. It should be specified as
a Motif <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [&cdeman.XmFontList;. ]]><![ %CDE.C.XO; [<structname role="typedef">XmFontList</structname>. ]]>Only character or mono-spaced fonts
@ -184,19 +184,19 @@ argument specifies the terminal <structname role="typedef">XFontSet</structname>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;font</literal> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-font</literal> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Equivalent to <literal>&minus;fn</literal>. The <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol>
<para>Equivalent to <literal>-fn</literal>. The <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol>
argument specifies the terminal <structname role="typedef">XFontSet</structname>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;foreground</literal> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-foreground</literal> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Equivalent to <literal>&minus;fg</literal>. The <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol> argument specifies the foreground color used by <command>dtterm</command>.</para>
<para>Equivalent to <literal>-fg</literal>. The <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol> argument specifies the foreground color used by <command>dtterm</command>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;geometry</literal> <symbol role="variable">geometry_string</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-geometry</literal> <symbol role="variable">geometry_string</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the terminal window's preferred size and position. Width and
height are expressed in characters. The default size is 24 lines of 80 characters
@ -205,12 +205,12 @@ argument specifies the terminal geometry used by <command>dtterm</command>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;help</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-help</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Display a message summarizing <command>dtterm</command> usage.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;iconic</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-iconic</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Display the terminal emulator initially in an iconified state.</para>
</listitem>
@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ argument specifies the terminal geometry used by <command>dtterm</command>.
the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;j</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-j</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Use jump scrolling. With jump scrolling, the screen may be scrolled
more than one line at a time. This provides for faster screen updates when
@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ lines are displayed. This is the default behavior.</para>
<para>Do not use jump scrolling.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;kshMode</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-kshMode</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Enable <command>ksh</command> mode. In <command>ksh</command> mode,
a key pressed with the extend modifier bit set generates an escape character
@ -255,11 +255,11 @@ and for generating multi-byte Asian characters.</para>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;l</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-l</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Enables output logging. When <command>dtterm</command> enables logging,
all output received from the subprocess is logged either to a file or to a
command pipeline (as specified via the <literal>&minus;lf</literal> option
command pipeline (as specified via the <literal>-lf</literal> option
described in the following paragraph). Since data are logged directly from
the subprocess, the log file includes all escape characters and carriage-return
and newline pairs the terminal line discipline sends. The application may
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ enable and disable logging via escape sequences.</para>
<para>Disable output logging. This is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;lf</literal> <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-lf</literal> <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Name the file to which <command>dtterm</command> writes the output log.
If the <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol> argument begins with a pipe
@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ file name is <literal>DttermLog</literal> <symbol role="variable">XXXXX</symbol>
in the directory from which the subprocess was started. The <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol> argument specifies the log file name used by <command>dtterm</command> for logging.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;ls</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-ls</literal></term>
<listitem><![ %CDE.C.CDE; [<para>Start a login shell (the first character
of <symbol role="Variable">argv</symbol>[0] is a dash), indicating to the
shell that it should read the system's <literal>profile</literal> and the
@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ is a dash), indicating to the shell that it should read the system's <literal>pr
<para>Start a normal (non-login) shell. This is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;map</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-map</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Map (de-iconify) <command>dtterm</command> upon subprocess output if <command>dtterm</command> is unmapped (iconified). The user can specify, via the <literal>mapOnOutputDelay</literal> resource, an initial period of time during which <command>dtterm</command> does not map itself upon subprocess output.</para>
</listitem>
@ -304,10 +304,10 @@ is a dash), indicating to the shell that it should read the system's <literal>pr
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;mb</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-mb</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Ring a bell when the user types at a specified distance from the right
margin. The distance from the right margin is specified by the <literal>&minus;nb</literal> option.</para>
margin. The distance from the right margin is specified by the <literal>-nb</literal> option.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>+mb</literal></term>
@ -316,27 +316,27 @@ margin. The distance from the right margin is specified by the <literal>&minus;n
the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;ms</literal> <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-ms</literal> <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the foreground color used by <command>dtterm</command> for the
terminal window's (X11) pointer cursor. The default is the terminal window's
foreground color (see <literal>&minus;foreground</literal>). The <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol> argument specifies the pointer foreground color used
foreground color (see <literal>-foreground</literal>). The <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol> argument specifies the pointer foreground color used
by <command>dtterm</command>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;name</literal> <symbol role="variable">prog_name</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-name</literal> <symbol role="variable">prog_name</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the X11 name of the <command>dtterm</command> window. The <symbol role="variable">prog_name</symbol> argument specifies the name to use.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;nb</literal> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-nb</literal> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Ring the bell this number of characters from the right margin when enabled.
The default is 10. The <symbol role="variable">number</symbol> argument specifies the
number of characters.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;rw</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-rw</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Enable reverse-wraparound.</para>
</listitem>
@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ number of characters.</para>
<para>Do not enable reverse-wraparound. This is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;S</literal><symbol role="variable">ccn</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-S</literal><symbol role="variable">ccn</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Run the terminal emulator against a pre-opened <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [ <literal>pty</literal> or STREAMS ]]>pseudo-terminal device. The terminal emulator
provides this option to use when the pseudo-terminal device name is of the
@ -359,9 +359,9 @@ specifies the file descriptor number that corresponds to the pseudo-terminal
device's already opened master side.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;S</literal><symbol role="variable">c.n</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-S</literal><symbol role="variable">c.n</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Equivalent to <literal>&minus;S</literal><symbol role="variable">ccn</symbol>, but
<para>Equivalent to <literal>-S</literal><symbol role="variable">ccn</symbol>, but
provided for systems with a larger pseudo-terminal device name space. The <symbol role="variable">c</symbol> argument specifies the last component of the pseudo-terminal
device slave name. The terminal emulator ignores this value and the value
may be empty. The <symbol role="Variable">n</symbol> argument specifies the
@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ number of the file descriptor that corresponds to the pseudo-terminal device's
already opened master side.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;sb</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-sb</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Display a scroll bar. This is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ already opened master side.</para>
<para>Do not display a scroll bar.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;sf</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-sf</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Generate Sun Function Key escape sequences instead of <![ %CDE.C.CDE; [standard
ANSI escape sequences ]]><![ %CDE.C.XO; [the escape sequences described in <xref
@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ of Sun Function Key escape sequences for the terminal's function keys. This
is the default behavior.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;sl</literal> <symbol role="Variable">screens</symbol>[<literal>s|l</literal>]</term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-sl</literal> <symbol role="Variable">screens</symbol>[<literal>s|l</literal>]</term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the number of lines in the terminal buffer beyond the length
of the window. The option value consists of a number followed by an optional
@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ The default is <literal>4s</literal>. The <symbol role="Variable">screens</symbo
argument specifies the number of screens or lines to save.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;ti</literal> <symbol role="variable">term_id</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-ti</literal> <symbol role="variable">term_id</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the name used by <command>dtterm</command> to select the correct
response to terminal ID queries. Valid values are <literal>vt100</literal>, <literal>vt101</literal>, <literal>vt102</literal>, and <literal>vt220</literal>. The
@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ default is <literal>vt220</literal>. The <symbol role="variable">term_id</symbol
specifies the terminal ID to use.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;title</literal> <symbol role="variable">title_string</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-title</literal> <symbol role="variable">title_string</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>The <symbol role="variable">title_string</symbol> argument specifies
the window title used by <command>dtterm</command>. The title
@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ otherwise the title defaults to <literal>Terminal</literal>.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;tm</literal> <symbol role="variable">term_modes</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-tm</literal> <symbol role="variable">term_modes</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify a string containing terminal-setting keywords and the characters
to which they can be bound. Allowable keywords include: <literal>intr</literal>, <literal>quit</literal>, <literal>erase</literal>, <literal>kill</literal>, <literal>eof</literal>, <literal>eol</literal>, <literal>swtch</literal>, <literal>start</literal>, <literal>stop</literal>, <literal>brk</literal>, <literal>susp</literal>, <literal>dsusp</literal>, <literal>rprnt</literal>, <literal>flush</literal>, <literal>weras</literal> and <literal>lnext</literal>. The
@ -438,19 +438,19 @@ for overriding the default terminal settings without having to do an <command>st
specifies the terminal mode string.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;tn</literal> <symbol role="variable">term_name</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-tn</literal> <symbol role="variable">term_name</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify a name to which <command>dtterm</command> sets the <systemitem class="environvar">TERM</systemitem> environment variable. The default is <command>dtterm</command>.
The <symbol role="variable">term_name</symbol> argument specifies the terminal name used
by <command>dtterm</command>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;usage</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-usage</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Display a usage message on the screen.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;vb</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-vb</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>Use a visual bell instead of an audible one. Flash the window instead
of ringing the terminal bell whenever a &lt;control>-G is received.</para>
@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ of ringing the terminal bell whenever a &lt;control>-G is received.</para>
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><literal>&minus;xrm</literal> <symbol role="variable">resource_string</symbol></term>
<varlistentry><term><literal>-xrm</literal> <symbol role="variable">resource_string</symbol></term>
<listitem>
<para>Allow the user to specify the X11 Resource Manager-style resources on
the command line. The <symbol role="variable">resource_string</symbol> argument specifies
@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ an X11 resource string. (See <function>XrmParseCommand</function>(3) and <functi
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><systemitem class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</systemitem></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specify the default X Windows display to connect to (see <literal>&minus;display</literal> ). The terminal emulator sets the subprocess's <systemitem class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</systemitem> environment variable to the connected X11 display name.
<para>Specify the default X Windows display to connect to (see <literal>-display</literal> ). The terminal emulator sets the subprocess's <systemitem class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</systemitem> environment variable to the connected X11 display name.
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ in an iconified state.</para>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><systemitem class="environvar">iconName</systemitem></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the name for the icon. When used with the <literal>&minus;e</literal> option, the default is the last component of the program's path;
<para>Specifies the name for the icon. When used with the <literal>-e</literal> option, the default is the last component of the program's path;
otherwise, the default is the last component of the name used to execute <command>dtterm</command> (that is, <symbol role="Variable">argv</symbol>[0]).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -1161,7 +1161,7 @@ queries. Valid values are <literal>vt100</literal>, <literal>vt101</literal>, <l
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><systemitem class="environvar">title</systemitem></term>
<listitem>
<para>Specifies the window title. When used with the <literal>&minus;e</literal>
<para>Specifies the window title. When used with the <literal>-e</literal>
option, the default is the last component of the program's path; otherwise,
the default is the last component of the name used to execute <command>dtterm</command> (that is, <symbol role="Variable">argv</symbol>[0]).</para>
</listitem>
@ -1216,13 +1216,13 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>Resource Setting</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;132</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-132</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*c132: True</classname></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>+132</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*c132: False</classname></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;aw</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-aw</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*autoWrap: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1230,13 +1230,13 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*autoWrap: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;background</classname> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-background</classname> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*background:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;bg</classname> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-bg</classname> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*background:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">background_color</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;bs</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-bs</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*backgroundIsSelect: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1244,34 +1244,34 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*backgroundIsSelect: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;C</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-C</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*consoleMode: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;display</classname> <symbol role="variable">display_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-display</classname> <symbol role="variable">display_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>.display:</classname> <symbol role="variable">display_name</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;e</classname> <symbol role="variable">program_argument...</symbol></entry></row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-e</classname> <symbol role="variable">program_argument...</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;fb</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-fb</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*userBoldFont:</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;fg</classname> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-fg</classname> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*foreground:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;fn</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-fn</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*userFont:</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;font</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-font</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*userFont:</classname> <symbol role="variable">fontset</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;foreground</classname> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-foreground</classname> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*foreground:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">foreground_color</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;geometry</classname> <symbol role="variable">geometry_string</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-geometry</classname> <symbol role="variable">geometry_string</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>.geometry:</classname> <symbol role="variable">geometry_string</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;iconic</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-iconic</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>.iconic: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>.iconic: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;j</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-j</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*jumpScroll: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*jumpScroll: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;kshMode</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-kshMode</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*kshMode: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*kshMode: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;l</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-l</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*logging: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1303,10 +1303,10 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*logging: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;lf</classname> <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-lf</classname> <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*logFile:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">file_name</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;ls</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-ls</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*loginShell: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*loginShell: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;map</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-map</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*mapOnOutput: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1322,7 +1322,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*mapOnOutput: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;mb</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-mb</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*marginBell: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1330,16 +1330,16 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*marginBell: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;ms</classname> <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-ms</classname> <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*pointerColor:</classname> <symbol role="variable">pointer_color</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;name</classname> <symbol role="variable">prog_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-name</classname> <symbol role="variable">prog_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>.name:</classname> <symbol role="variable">prog_name</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;nb</classname> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-nb</classname> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*nMarginBell:</classname> <symbol role="variable">number</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;rw</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-rw</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*reverseWrap: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*reverseWrap: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;sb</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-sb</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*scrollBar: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*scrollBar: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;sf</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-sf</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*sunFunctionKeys: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
@ -1363,25 +1363,25 @@ The following table describes the relationship between the two:</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*sunFunctionKeys: False</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;sl</classname> <symbol role="Variable">screens</symbol>s</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-sl</classname> <symbol role="Variable">screens</symbol>s</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*saveLines:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">screens * lines/screen</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;sl</classname> <symbol role="Variable">lines</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-sl</classname> <symbol role="Variable">lines</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*saveLines:</classname> <symbol role="Variable">lines</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;ti</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_id</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-ti</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_id</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*termId:</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_id</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;title</classname> <symbol role="variable">title_string</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-title</classname> <symbol role="variable">title_string</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>.title:</classname> <symbol role="variable">title_string</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;tm</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_modes</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-tm</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_modes</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*ttyModes:</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_modes</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;tn</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-tn</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_name</symbol></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*termName:</classname> <symbol role="variable">term_name</symbol></entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>&minus;vb</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>-vb</classname></entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top"><classname>*visualBell: True</classname></entry>
</row>
<row>

32
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1_dt/wm.sgm
View file

@ -44,18 +44,18 @@ to organize windows by task and make efficient use of screen real estate.
<refsect2>
<title>Options</title>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>&minus;display</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>display</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>-display</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>display</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>This option specifies the display to use; see <command>X</command>(1).
</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>&minus;xrm</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>resourcestring</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>-xrm</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>resourcestring</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>This option specifies a resource string to use.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>&minus;multiscreen</emphasis></term>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>-multiscreen</emphasis></term>
<listitem>
<para>This option causes <command>dtwm</command> to manage all screens on
the display. Since <command>dtwm</command> does this by default, this option
@ -63,13 +63,13 @@ is of limited use. See the <emphasis>multiScreen</emphasis> resource for informa
on managing a single screen.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>&minus;name</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>name</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>-name</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>name</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>This option causes <command>dtwm</command> to retrieve its resources
using the specified name, as in <literal>name*resource</literal>.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>&minus;screens</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>name&ensp;[name&ensp;[...]]</literal></term>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>-screens</emphasis>&ensp;<literal>name&ensp;[name&ensp;[...]]</literal></term>
<listitem>
<para>This option specifies the resource names to use for the screens managed
by <command>dtwm</command>. If <command>dtwm</command> is managing a single
@ -100,10 +100,10 @@ of specific resources. Resources are defined under the heading "X DEFAULTS."
<refsect2>
<title>Screens</title>
<para>By default, <command>dtwm</command> manages only the single screen specified
by the <emphasis>&minus;display</emphasis> option or the <systemitem class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</systemitem> environment variable (by default, screen 0). If the <emphasis>&minus;multiscreen</emphasis> option is specified or if the <emphasis>multiScreen</emphasis> resource is True, <command>dtwm</command> tries to manage all
by the <emphasis>-display</emphasis> option or the <systemitem class="EnvironVar">DISPLAY</systemitem> environment variable (by default, screen 0). If the <emphasis>-multiscreen</emphasis> option is specified or if the <emphasis>multiScreen</emphasis> resource is True, <command>dtwm</command> tries to manage all
the screens on the display.</para>
<para>When <command>dtwm</command> is managing multiple screens, the <emphasis>&minus;screens</emphasis> option can be used to give each screen a unique
resource name. The names are separated by blanks, for example, <emphasis>&minus;screens</emphasis> scr0 scr1. If there are more screens than names,
<para>When <command>dtwm</command> is managing multiple screens, the <emphasis>-screens</emphasis> option can be used to give each screen a unique
resource name. The names are separated by blanks, for example, <emphasis>-screens</emphasis> scr0 scr1. If there are more screens than names,
resources for the remaining screens will be retrieved using the first name.
By default, the screen number is used for the screen name.</para>
</refsect2>
@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ environment variables and the current language environment.</para>
specific types of resources. These include files that contain bitmaps, fonts,
and <command>dtwm</command> specific resources such as menus and behavior
specifications (for example, button and key bindings).</para>
<para><emphasis>Dtwm</emphasis> is the resource class name of <command>dtwm</command> and <command>dtwm</command> is the default resource name used by <command>dtwm</command> to look up resources. the <emphasis>&minus;screens</emphasis>
<para><emphasis>Dtwm</emphasis> is the resource class name of <command>dtwm</command> and <command>dtwm</command> is the default resource name used by <command>dtwm</command> to look up resources. the <emphasis>-screens</emphasis>
command line option specifies resource names, such as "dtwm_b+w" and "dtwm_color".)
In the following discussion of resource specification, "Dtwm" and "dtwm" (and
the aliased <command>dtwm</command> resource names) can be used interchangeably,
@ -627,19 +627,19 @@ and so on. The following list identifies the naming convention used for window
manager menu components:</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Menu Title LabelGadget &minus; "TitleName"</para>
<para>Menu Title LabelGadget - "TitleName"</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Menu Title SeparatorGadget &minus; "TitleSeparator"</para>
<para>Menu Title SeparatorGadget - "TitleSeparator"</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>CascadeButtonGadget &minus; "CascadeButtonGadget&lt;n>"</para>
<para>CascadeButtonGadget - "CascadeButtonGadget&lt;n>"</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>PushButtonGadget &minus; "PushButtonGadget&lt;n>"</para>
<para>PushButtonGadget - "PushButtonGadget&lt;n>"</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>SeparatorGadget &minus; "SeparatorGadget&lt;n>"</para>
<para>SeparatorGadget - "SeparatorGadget&lt;n>"</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>Refer to the man page for each class for a list of resources that can
@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ be specified.</para>
manager parts can be specified:</para>
</refsect2>
<refsect2>
<title>Component Appearance Resources &minus; All Window Manager Parts</title>
<title>Component Appearance Resources - All Window Manager Parts</title>
<informaltable remap="center" orient="port">
<tgroup cols="4" colsep="0" rowsep="0">
<?PubTbl tgroup dispwid="5.78in">
@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ the key bindings to use for screen "1".</para>
<entry align="left" valign="top">transientFunctions</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">TransientFunctions</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">string</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">&minus;minimize&minus;maximize</entry></row>
<entry align="left" valign="top">-minimize-maximize</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top">useIconBox</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">UseIconBox</entry>

34
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1m/dtspcd.sgm
View file

@ -27,11 +27,11 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>dtspcd</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;debug</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;log</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;auth_dir<Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;timeout<Replaceable>num_minutes</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;mount_point<Replaceable>mount_point</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-debug</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-log</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-auth_dir<Replaceable>directory</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-timeout<Replaceable>num_minutes</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-mount_point<Replaceable>mount_point</Replaceable></Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ requesting a process to be started on the daemon's host.
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;auth_dir</Literal> <Emphasis>directory</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-auth_dir</Literal> <Emphasis>directory</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The default authentication directory is the user's
$HOME directory.
@ -59,12 +59,12 @@ Note that
<Emphasis>directory</Emphasis> must be exported to hosts wishing
to use the
<Literal>dtspc</Literal> service.
<Emphasis>directory</Emphasis> &minus; the name of the directory to use for authentication.
<Emphasis>directory</Emphasis> - the name of the directory to use for authentication.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;timeout</Literal> <Emphasis>minutes</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-timeout</Literal> <Emphasis>minutes</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>By default, the dtspcd process will terminate if it does
not have any activity (process start or process stop)
@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ To change the timeout, set
desired number of minutes.
To force the daemon to not use a timer,
set
<Emphasis>minutes</Emphasis> to &minus;1.
<Emphasis>minutes</Emphasis> &minus; the number of minutes for the timer.
<Emphasis>minutes</Emphasis> to -1.
<Emphasis>minutes</Emphasis> - the number of minutes for the timer.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;mount_point</Literal> <Emphasis>mount_point</Emphasis></Term>
<Term><Literal>-mount_point</Literal> <Emphasis>mount_point</Emphasis></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>The file system's mount point is named
<Emphasis>mount_point.</Emphasis> For example,
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ definitions of
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;log</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-log</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>This option turns on logging of status information
to the file
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ The default is to not do any logging.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;debug</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-debug</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>This option turns on logging of dtspc protocol
to the file
@ -143,13 +143,13 @@ on the daemon's host must be mounted to the client
host.
If the user's home directory is not readable
and the
<Literal>&minus;auth_dir</Literal> command line option is not used,
<Literal>-auth_dir</Literal> command line option is not used,
the directory
<Filename>/var/dt/tmp</Filename> will be used.
</Para>
<Para>To use a directory other than the user's home directory
for authentication, use the
<Literal>&minus;auth_dir</Literal> command
<Literal>-auth_dir</Literal> command
line option.
</Para>
</RefSect1>
@ -249,8 +249,8 @@ when a process is executed
<RefSect1>
<Title>DIAGNOSTICS</Title>
<Para>Use the command line options
<Literal>&minus;log</Literal> and
<Literal>&minus;debug</Literal> (described above) to get diagnostic
<Literal>-log</Literal> and
<Literal>-debug</Literal> (described above) to get diagnostic
information.
</Para>
</RefSect1>

10
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1m/rpccmsd.sgm
View file

@ -27,8 +27,8 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>rpc.cmsd
[&minus;d]</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;s</Arg>
[-d]</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">-s</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -47,14 +47,14 @@ resource-scheduling data. Its primary client is
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;d</Term>
<Term>-d</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Enables debugging output.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;s</Term>
<Term>-s</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Runs rpc.cmsd in the foreground. This option should
be used when rpc.cmsd is invoked manually for debugging purposes.
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ be used when rpc.cmsd is invoked manually for debugging purposes.
<RefSect1>
<Title>STDOUT</Title>
<Para>When the
<Literal>&minus;d</Literal> option is used,
<Literal>-d</Literal> option is used,
<Command>rpc.cmsd</Command> writes the debugging information to stdout.
</Para>
</RefSect1>

10
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1m/rpcttdbs.sgm
View file

@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ stored on the host.
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;G</Term>
<Term>-G</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Perform garbage collection.
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ database files.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;m DTMOUNTPOINT_value</Term>
<Term>-m DTMOUNTPOINT_value</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Sets the DTMOUNTPOINT environment variable for
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ will override it.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;n</Term>
<Term>-n</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Turn off permission checking. Normally the protection of the file
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ spec. This option should be used with caution.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;v</Term>
<Term>-v</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Print out the version number.
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ spec. This option should be used with caution.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;?</Term>
<Term>-?</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Prints out the command usage information.

28
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1m/ttdbck.sgm
View file

@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ diagnosis option is given.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;f&ensp; filename</Term>
<Term>-f&ensp; filename</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Restricts the set of specs to be inspected or modified to those which
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ wildcards which must be escaped to prevent the shell from expanding them.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;k&ensp; objidkey</Term>
<Term>-k&ensp; objidkey</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>An object id key, specifying a particular spec to be displayed or modified.
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ specify its key here.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;t&ensp; type</Term>
<Term>-t&ensp; type</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Restricts the set of specs to be inspected or modified to those with
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ fail the diagnostic check.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;b</Term>
<Term>-b</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Check for badly formed specs: those which have no file or type or those
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ which have types not defined in the type database.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;x</Term>
<Term>-x</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Check for specs which refer to files that no longer exist.
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ which have types not defined in the type database.
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;i</Term>
<Term>-i</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Display the object id (including the object id key.)
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ which have types not defined in the type database.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;m</Term>
<Term>-m</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Display the mandatory data that must appear in every spec: the otype
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ stored.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;p</Term>
<Term>-p</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Display all the properties and values for each selected spec.
@ -167,11 +167,11 @@ stored.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;a</Term>
<Term>-a</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Display all data (equivalent to specifying
<Literal>&minus;imp</Literal>)</Para>
<Literal>-imp</Literal>)</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
</VariableList>
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ stored.
<Title>Repair options</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;I</Term>
<Term>-I</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Invoke the NetISAM isrepair() function for all files accessed.
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ return EBADFILE (error code 105).
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;F &ensp;filename</Term>
<Term>-F &ensp;filename</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Change the file name for the selected specs to the supplied file name.
@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ return EBADFILE (error code 105).
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;T &ensp;otypeid</Term>
<Term>-T &ensp;otypeid</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Change the type of the selected specs to the given otype.
@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ return EBADFILE (error code 105).
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;Z</Term>
<Term>-Z</Term>
<ListItem>
<!-- ex-TP-->
<Para>Remove the selected specs entirely.

24
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man1m/ttdbserv.sgm
View file

@ -23,12 +23,12 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>rpc.ttdbserverd</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;G</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;m <Replaceable>DTMOUNTPOINT_value</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;n</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-G</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-m <Replaceable>DTMOUNTPOINT_value</Replaceable></Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-n</Arg>
<!--.RB [ -t \ level]-->
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;v</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;?</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-v</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-?</Arg>
<!-- This was disabled for release 1.0-->
<!-- [-a authentication-level]-->
</CmdSynopsis>
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ on a different host.
<Title>OPTIONS</Title>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;G</Term>
<Term>-G</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Perform garbage collection.
This cleans up the <Filename>TT_DB</Filename> directories and the
@ -103,19 +103,19 @@ associated internal database files.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;m <Replaceable>DTMOUNTPOINT_value</Replaceable></Term>
<Term>-m <Replaceable>DTMOUNTPOINT_value</Replaceable></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Sets the <SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">DTMOUNTPOINT</SystemItem>
environment variable for
<Command>rpc.ttdbserverd</Command>.
If there is already an environment variable called
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">DTMOUNTPOINT</SystemItem>, &minus;m
<SystemItem Class="EnvironVar">DTMOUNTPOINT</SystemItem>, -m
will override it.
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;n</Term>
<Term>-n</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Turn off permission checking. Normally the protection of the file
passed to
@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ spec. This option should be used with caution.
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;v</Term>
<Term>-v</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Print out the version number.
</Para>
@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ spec. This option should be used with caution.
<!--.B \-t level-->
<!--Turns on trace level, the valid level is between 1 to 10.-->
<VarListEntry>
<Term>&minus;?</Term>
<Term>-?</Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Prints out the command usage information.
</Para>
@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ spec. This option should be used with caution.
<Para>If set, the value of this environment variable will be used in place
of <Filename>/net</Filename> in pathnames constructed to answer
&cdeman.tt.host.netfile.file;
queries. This environment variable can also be set by using the &minus;m
queries. This environment variable can also be set by using the -m
flag for <Command>rpc.ttdbserverd</Command>.
</Para>
</ListItem>

12
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man4/dtaction.sgm
View file

@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ string requires shell features such as redirection of standard input, redirectio
of standard output, or pipes, the appropriate shell must be specified explicitly
in the execution string. For example:</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>EXEC_STRING sh &minus;c 'ls &minus;l | more'</programlisting>
<programlisting>EXEC_STRING sh -c 'ls -l | more'</programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>Keywords are evaluated in the <systemitem class="Constant">EXEC_STRING</systemitem> field. There is no default value for the <systemitem class="Constant">EXEC_STRING</systemitem> field.</para>
</refsect2>
@ -401,13 +401,13 @@ used to specify a unique terminal-window geometry, font, color or title.</para>
<para>The value of the <systemitem class="Constant">TERM_OPTS</systemitem>
field must be an option string in a form the terminal emulator supports and
it must only affect the appearance of the terminal window. For example, options
such as <literal>&minus;e</literal>, which affect the behavior of the terminal
such as <literal>-e</literal>, which affect the behavior of the terminal
window, must not be used.</para>
<para>Keywords are evaluated in the <systemitem class="Constant">TERM_OPTS</systemitem> field. The default value of the <systemitem class="Constant">TERM_OPTS</systemitem> field is</para>
<informalexample remap="indent">
<programlisting>&minus;title action_label</programlisting>
<programlisting>-title action_label</programlisting>
</informalexample>
<para>where <emphasis>action_label</emphasis> is the <systemitem class="Constant">LABEL</systemitem> field for the action. See &cdeman.dtterm; (or <command>xterm</command>(1)) for the meaning of <literal>&minus;title</literal>.</para>
<para>where <emphasis>action_label</emphasis> is the <systemitem class="Constant">LABEL</systemitem> field for the action. See &cdeman.dtterm; (or <command>xterm</command>(1)) for the meaning of <literal>-title</literal>.</para>
</refsect2>
<refsect2>
<title>TT_ARGn_MODE Field</title>
@ -714,7 +714,7 @@ actions that do not define the field. The default value is <literal>%DatabaseHos
<listitem>
<para>Specifies an alternative terminal emulator for terminal-based actions
that execute locally. Any terminal emulator specified by this resource must
support the <literal>&minus;title</literal> and <literal>&minus;e</literal>
support the <literal>-title</literal> and <literal>-e</literal>
options as described in &cdeman.dtterm;. The default value is &cdeman.dtterm;.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ is left open. The default value is 3.</para>
default printer.
ARG_TYPE Text
TYPE COMMAND
EXEC_STRING sh &minus;c 'pr %Arg_1"File to print:"% | lp'
EXEC_STRING sh -c 'pr %Arg_1"File to print:"% | lp'
WINDOW_TYPE NO_STDIO
}</programlisting>
</informalexample>

4
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man4/dtfpfile.sgm
View file

@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Keywords and Values</literal></entry></row>
<entry align="left" valign="top">False</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top">PANEL_GEOMETRY</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">{+&minus;}<symbol role="Variable">xoffset</symbol>[{+&minus;}<symbol role="Variable">yoffset</symbol>]</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">{+-}<symbol role="Variable">xoffset</symbol>[{+-}<symbol role="Variable">yoffset</symbol>]</entry>
<entry align="left" valign="top">NULL</entry></row>
<row>
<entry align="left" valign="top">RESOLUTION</entry>
@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ used to associate a control with an executable. It is necessary for control
types of <literal>client</literal> (an X client running within the front panel)
and for <literal>icon</literal> when the keyword <systemitem class="Constant">PUSH_RECALL</systemitem> is True. The value <emphasis>client name</emphasis>
is the name of the executable or can be set via a command-line argument for
some clients (such as <command>xterm</command> <literal>&minus;name</literal> <emphasis>panelterm</emphasis>). The <emphasis>client name</emphasis> for a running
some clients (such as <command>xterm</command> <literal>-name</literal> <emphasis>panelterm</emphasis>). The <emphasis>client name</emphasis> for a running
client can be found by executing xprop. The first string of the <systemitem class="Constant">WM_CLASS</systemitem> property is the value used.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>

12
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man4/dtsrdbfl.sgm
View file

@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ may also be enhanced by the database developer.
</para>
<para>All database files for a single database must be located in the same
directory. The directory is specified in the offline build tools by the
optional path prefix in the <literal>&minus;d</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dbname</Symbol> argument. The directory is specified for
optional path prefix in the <literal>-d</literal><Symbol Role="Variable">dbname</Symbol> argument. The directory is specified for
the online API by a <systemitem class="environvar">PATH</systemitem>
configuration file (ocf file).
</para>
@ -136,24 +136,24 @@ See &cdeman.dtsrlangfiles; for formats of language files.
</para>
<simplelist>
<member>
<filename>eng.stp</filename> &minus; for
<filename>eng.stp</filename> - for
<systemitem class="constant">DtSrLaENG</systemitem> and
<systemitem class="constant">DtSrLaENG2</systemitem>
</member>
<member>
<filename>esp.stp</filename> &minus; for
<filename>esp.stp</filename> - for
<systemitem class="constant">DtSrLaESP</systemitem>
</member>
<member>
<filename>fra.stp</filename> &minus; for
<filename>fra.stp</filename> - for
<systemitem class="constant">DtSrLaFRA</systemitem>
</member>
<member>
<filename>deu.stp</filename> &minus; for
<filename>deu.stp</filename> - for
<systemitem class="constant">DtSrLaDEU</systemitem>
</member>
<member>
<filename>ita.stp</filename> &minus; for
<filename>ita.stp</filename> - for
<systemitem class="constant">DtSrLaITA</systemitem>
</member>
</simplelist>

4
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man4/dtwmrc.sgm
View file

@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ connection to the X server is terminated. If the application observes neither
of these protocols, its connection to the X server is terminated.</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><function>f.lower</function>&ensp;[<emphasis>&minus;</emphasis> <literal>client</literal> | <symbol role="Variable">within</symbol>&ensp;| <emphasis>freeFamily</emphasis>]</term>
<varlistentry><term><function>f.lower</function>&ensp;[<emphasis>-</emphasis> <literal>client</literal> | <symbol role="Variable">within</symbol>&ensp;| <emphasis>freeFamily</emphasis>]</term>
<listitem>
<para>This function lowers a primary window to the bottom of the global window
stack (where it obscures no other window) and lowers the secondary window
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ switches to the last workspace.</para>
<para>This function terminates dtwm (but NOT the X window system).</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><function>f.raise</function>&ensp;[<emphasis>&minus;</emphasis><symbol role="Variable">client</symbol> | <symbol role="Variable">within</symbol>
<varlistentry><term><function>f.raise</function>&ensp;[<emphasis>-</emphasis><symbol role="Variable">client</symbol> | <symbol role="Variable">within</symbol>
| <emphasis>freeFamily</emphasis>]</term>
<listitem>
<para>This function raises a primary window to the top of the global window

4
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man5/DtEditor.sgm
View file

@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ with at least the following members:
<ListItem>
<Para>The data being transferred is a pointer
to a
<SystemItem Class="Constant">NULL</SystemItem>&minus;terminated string of characters (a <StructName Role="typedef">char *</StructName>).
<SystemItem Class="Constant">NULL</SystemItem>-terminated string of characters (a <StructName Role="typedef">char *</StructName>).
</Para>
</ListItem>
</VarListEntry>
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ indicates the type of data contained in the structure.
The
<Symbol Role="Variable">string</Symbol> argument
points to a
<SystemItem Class="Constant">NULL</SystemItem>&minus;terminated string of characters.
<SystemItem Class="Constant">NULL</SystemItem>-terminated string of characters.
It is valid when
<Symbol Role="Variable">type</Symbol> is
<SystemItem Class="Constant">DtEDITOR_TEXT</SystemItem>. The

102
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man5/csacsa.sgm
View file

@ -139,16 +139,16 @@ typedef CSA_string CSA_time_duration;
#define CSA_CONFIG_VER_IMPLEM ((CSA_enum)8)
#define CSA_CONFIG_VER_SPEC ((CSA_enum)9)
/* CHARACTER SET IDENTIFIERS */
#define CSA_CHARSET_437 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET IBM 437//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_850 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET IBM 850//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_1252 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET Microsoft 1252//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISTRING "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET Apple ISTRING//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_UNICODE "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET UNICODE//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_T61 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET TSS T61//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_IA5 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET TSS IA5//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISO_10646 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET ISO 10646//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISO_646 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET ISO 646//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISO_8859_1 "&minus;//XAPIA//CHARSET ISO 8859&minus;1//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_437 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET IBM 437//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_850 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET IBM 850//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_1252 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET Microsoft 1252//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISTRING "-//XAPIA//CHARSET Apple ISTRING//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_UNICODE "-//XAPIA//CHARSET UNICODE//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_T61 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET TSS T61//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_IA5 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET TSS IA5//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISO_10646 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET ISO 10646//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISO_646 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET ISO 646//EN"
#define CSA_CHARSET_ISO_8859_1 "-//XAPIA//CHARSET ISO 8859-1//EN"
#define CSA_CB_CALENDAR_LOGON ((CSA_flags)0x0
#define CSA_CB_CALENDAR_DELETED ((CSA_flags)0x1)
#define CSA_CB_CALENDAR_ATTRIBUTE_UPDATED ((CSA_flags)0x2)
@ -211,89 +211,89 @@ typedef CSA_string CSA_time_duration;
/* CALENDAR ATTRIBUTES */
/* CALENDAR ATTRIBUTE NAMES */
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_ACCESS_LIST &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Access List//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Access List//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_CALENDAR_NAME &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Calendar Name//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Calendar Name//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_CALENDAR_OWNER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Calendar Owner//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Calendar Owner//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_CALENDAR_SIZE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Calendar Size//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Calendar Size//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_CODE_PAGE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Character Set//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Character Set//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_COUNTRY &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Country//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Country//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_DATE_CREATED &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Date Created//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Date Created//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_LANGUAGE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Language//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Language//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_NUMBER_ENTRIES &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Number Entries//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Number Entries//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_PRODUCT_IDENTIFIER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Product Identifier//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Product Identifier//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_TIME_ZONE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Time Zone//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Time Zone//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_VERSION &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Version//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Version//EN"
#define CSA_CAL_ATTR_WORK_SCHEDULE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Work Schedule//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/CALATTR//NONSGML Work Schedule//EN"
/* ENTRY ATTRIBUTES */
/* ENTRY ATTRIBUTES NAMES */
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_ATTENDEE_LIST &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Attendee List//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Attendee List//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_AUDIO_REMINDER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Audio Reminder//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Audio Reminder//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_CLASSIFICATION &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Classification//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Classification//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_DATE_COMPLETED &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Date Complated//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Date Complated//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_DATE_CREATED &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Date Created//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Date Created//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_DESCRIPTION &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Description//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Description//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_DUE_DATE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Due Date//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Due Date//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_END_DATE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML End Date//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML End Date//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_EXCEPTION_DATES &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Exception Dates//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Exception Dates//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_EXCEPTION_RULE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Exception Rule//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Exception Rule//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_FLASHING_REMINDER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Flashing Reminder//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Flashing Reminder//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_LAST_UPDATE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Last Update//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Last Update//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_MAIL_REMINDER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Mail Reminder//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Mail Reminder//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_NUMBER_RECURRENCES &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Number Recurrences//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Number Recurrences//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_ORGANIZER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Organizer//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Organizer//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_POPUP_REMINDER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Popup Reminder//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Popup Reminder//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_PRIORITY &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Priority//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Priority//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_RECURRENCE_RULE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Recurrence Rule//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Recurrence Rule//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_RECURREING_DATES &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Recurring Dates//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Recurring Dates//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_REFERENCE_IDENTIFIER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Reference_identifier//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Reference_identifier//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_SEQUENCE_NUMBER &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Sequence Number//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Sequence Number//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_SPONSOR &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Sponsor//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Sponsor//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_START_DATE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Start Date//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Start Date//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_STATUS &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Status//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Status//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_SUBTYPE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Subtype//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Subtype//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_SUMMARY &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Summary//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Summary//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_TIME_TRANSPARENCY &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Transparency//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Transparency//EN"
#define CSA_ENTRY_ATTR_TYPE &bsol;
"&minus;//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Type//EN"
"-//XAPIA/CSA/ENTRYATTR//NONSGML Type//EN"
/* COMMON EXTENSIONS DECLARATIONS */
/* EXTENSION SET ID */
/* Common Extension Set */

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man5/dtsearch.sgm
View file

@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ for extracting summary database information, including
</RefSect2>
<RefSect2>
<Title>Argument Conventions</Title>
<para>Optional command line arguments are specified with a dash (&minus;) and
<para>Optional command line arguments are specified with a dash (-) and
typically a single character argument identifier. Some required
arguments also use the dash convention. Unless specifically indicated
otherwise, dash arguments may be specified in any order. Where values

2
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man5/dttermes.sgm
View file

@ -1404,7 +1404,7 @@ on the setting of the mode specified, either via the <literal>appKeypadDefault</
<refsect2>
<title>ANSI Function Keys</title>
<para>The function keys transmit the following escape sequences unless Sun
function keys mode has been selected, either via the <command>dtterm</command> <literal>&minus;sk</literal> option, or the <literal>sunFunctionKeys</literal> resource
function keys mode has been selected, either via the <command>dtterm</command> <literal>-sk</literal> option, or the <literal>sunFunctionKeys</literal> resource
in &cdeman.dtterm; or the DtTerm widget.</para>
<informaltable remap="center" orient="port">
<tgroup cols="2" colsep="0" rowsep="0">

4
cde/doc/en_US.UTF-8/guides/man/man6/ttsnoop.sgm
View file

@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
<RefSynopsisDiv>
<CmdSynopsis>
<Command>ttsnoop</Command>
<Arg Choice="opt">&minus;t</Arg>
<Arg Choice="opt">-t</Arg>
</CmdSynopsis>
</RefSynopsisDiv>
<RefSect1>
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ to exit <command>ttsnoop</command>
</Para>
<VariableList>
<VarListEntry>
<Term><Literal>&minus;t</Literal></Term>
<Term><Literal>-t</Literal></Term>
<ListItem>
<Para>Print trace output. Of particular interest is that ttsnoop
will print example ToolTalk API code in the invoking OpenWindows